GFZ-62884EN B-62884ENGE Fanuc CNC Open CNC Ladder Editing Package Operator’s Manual Presented By: CNC Center For Product Needs Please Visit: http://www.cnccenter.com/ OR Email:
[email protected] OR Call: 1-800-963-3513 GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Open CNC Ladder Editing Package Operator's Manual GFZ-62884EN/01 September 1996 GFL-001 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used. Caution Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken. Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment. This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. ©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Table of contents B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3 The Overview of Ladder Editing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported PMC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 8 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PMC Programming Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Symbol & Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 12 om 1.3.1 1.3.2 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.2 PACKAGE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.3 Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 22 2.4 DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.5 CONFIG.SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.6 ce nt e 2.3.1 2.3.2 r.c 2.1 FILE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 2.6.2 28 File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Constitution of Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 29 3. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.1 STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.2.1 33 COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.4 ON–LINE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 43 47 101 105 106 OFF-LINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 w 3.5 37 Overview of the On–Line Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .c 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 nc Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decompilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w w 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 115 115 174 195 202 209 220 224 235 236 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 4.1 A : INITIAL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 238 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 239 B : TITLE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 i Table of contents 4.2.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 C : I/O MODULE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 4.3.1 4.3.2 241 241 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 4.4.1 242 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 243 243 244 246 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 4.6.1 4.7 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 G : MESSAGE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 4.7.1 4.8 H : PRINTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.9 249 249 250 I : COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 251 255 J : DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.11 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 256 257 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.12 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 259 262 L : INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.13 248 249 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.10 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r.c 4.6 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error (at Editing Step Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . om 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 ce nt e 4.5 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nc 4.4 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 270 N : ON–LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 w 4.13.1 .c 4.3 B–62884EN/01 APPENDIX w A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 A.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 283 LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 w A.1.1 A.1.2 A.2 282 B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 C.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET. CNF” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii 291 Table of contents B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 D.1 DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 D.2 CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 D.3 CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 D.3.1 D.3.2 D.3.3 D.4 Converting by System Parameter Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 299 301 TRANSFER FROM P–G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 om D.4.1 E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 r.c G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ce nt e H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 w w w .c nc I. INQUIRY FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 iii c nc ce nt e r.c om 1 1 .1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 w w w . activate. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 1. For details of the operating conditions.1.c Inquiry form If you have any questions after reading this operator’s manual and the manuals listed above. requires the use of the sequence program development software listed below.c The development of a sequence program on a personal computer. This software is designed to operate on the FANUC OPEN CNC and supports both the Japanese and English languages. [FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4 /RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2 Programming manual (LADDER language) ] B-61863E w w w . use the inquiry form attached at Appendix I to consult us the questions. and operate this software about that are specific to the system designed for use with personal computers. 2 . OVERVIEW Ladder Editing Package is a programming system for developing FANUC PMC sequence programs. For details. Personal computer Name Specification Remarks om FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing A08B-9201-J510 Japanese and Package English are both supported r. Name Operator’s manual FAPT LADDER Operator’s Manual (B–66131E) FAPT LADDER–II FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN) ce nt e FAPT LADDER nc This manual explains procedures required to install. see Chapter 2. refer to the relevant manuals. operating independently of the FANUC OPEN CNC.1 Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package. For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs. refer to the manuals listed below. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 The following abbreviations are used in this manual. 1) For PMC models Abbreviations 2) Others Name r.c nc ce nt e MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS. unless it is necessary to distinguish between the two operating systems.1.c Abbreviations FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4 om PMC-R Series · PMC-RA3 · PMC-RB3 · PMC-RB4 · PMC-RB5 · PMC-RB6 · PMC-RC3 · PMC-RC4 PMC Models OPEN CNC MMC–IV HSSB FANUC OPEN CNC FANUC MMC–IV High Speed Serial Bus w w w . 3 . 1. and output 2) Sequence program monitoring/debugging – Signal status monitoring – PMC status monitoring – Ladder monitoring/editing – Alarm display – Cross reference display 3) PMC parameter setting/display 4) Sequence program execution/termination 5) Writing to flash ROM 6) Sequence program printout w w w .c om The Overview of Ladder Editing Package 4 .2.1 The Ladder Editing Package is a software package that enables the use of the following PMC functions and sequence program development functions on the OPEN CNC. display. <Ladder Editing Package functions> 1) Sequence program input. editing.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS 1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 1.c nc ce nt e r. c nc Printer 1.1.1.1.2.2(a) 5 Machine .1.2.1.1 Function Overview OPEN CNC Machine CNC / PMC On–line functions om DI/ DO Sequence program monitoring/debugging Sequence program execution/termination Sequence program transfer r.2.1.2 w w OPEN CNC System Configurations Fig. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 1.1 Function Overview A variety of OPEN CNC system configurations are described below.1. 1) System with a FANUC NC board.c PMC parameter setting/display ce nt e Floppy disk Ladder editing package Keyboard Input/editing Drawing Hard disk w . built into a commercially available personal computer [Overview] FANUC NC board → Incorporated Personal computer Fig.2. ” Key Correspondence Full keyboard Custom Tab System Alt Alter nc Ctrl Can Esc HELP w w w .1. refer to the “FANUC MMC–IV Operator’s Manual (B–62494EN). [Program backup destination] PMC flash memory 3) System in which the CNC is connected to a commercially available personal computer via the high–speed serial bus 6 .2(b) ce nt e r. use the full keyboard. assign those keys that are not available on the CRT/MDI panel as described below.c Back Space CRT/MDI Note The CRT/MDI keys cannot be used to start a system by means of Japanese input. For details.1. To enter comments in Japanese.2.c [CRT/MDI operation] When using this system with the CRT/MDI panel. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 [Program backup destination] PMC program memory [hard disk] of the personal computer 2) System with a personal computer board (MMC–IV). built into the CNC [Overview] CNC with MMC–IV om Machine Fig.1. 1.2 w w w Supported PMC Functions 1) Supported PMC models The following PMC models are supported: – PMC–RA3 – PMC–RB3 – PMC–RB4 – PMC–RB5 – PMC–RB6 – PMC–RC3 – PMC–RC4 2) Supported functions for each PMC model Table 1.c [Program backup destination] PMC flash memory 4) System in which the CNC is connected to a FANUC intelligent terminal via the high–speed serial bus [Overview] Intelligent terminal CNC ce nt e High–speed serial bus Machine Fig.1. [Program backup destination] PMC flash memory .2.2. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 [Overview] CNC High–speed serial bus Personal computer Machine om Fig. refer to the sections indicated in the “Reference section” column.1. 7 .2.2. For details of the functions.1.1.2(c) r.c 1.2(d) nc [CRT/MDI operation] See Item 2) above.2 lists the supported functions for each PMC model. refer to the PMC programming manual.) 1.5.5 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f ∆ ∆ f f f f PMC Handy File 3.2 f f f On–line functions 3.2.6 Memory card Link function Section A.c Input/ output out ut device om Step sequence program 8 .4 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ Off–line functions 3. For details.1.2.3 w w w .5.c nc Sequence Program Creation ce nt e f f r.3 3.2 Functions Supported for Each PMC Model PMC model Function Reference section RA3 RB3 RB4 RB4 (STEP RB5 SEQ) RB6 RB6 (STEP RC3 SEQ) RC4 RC4 (STEP SEQ) 1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 Table 1.2 in Appendix A f f f f f f f f f f f f ∆ f f f f f : Usable : Not usable ∆ : May be usable (Whether the functions are supported varies with the series and editions of the PMC and CNC. control scale determination) r.c Print? NO Decompile w Sequence program printing End w End w In on–line mode. Other PMC programming systems (for use with personal computers) are FAPT LADDER and FAPT LADDER–II. CNC) Determine interface specifications (DI/DO assignment) om Determine control operation specifications (calculation of number of DI/DO points. refer to the following manuals: – FAPT LADDER Operator’s Manual (B–66131E) – FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN) Fig. and printing New? NO Off–line functions ce nt e On–line functions YES Ladder diagram editing Mnemonic Ladder diagram monitoring/editing Signal monitoring NO YES NO nc Debugging completed? YES Debugging completed? editing NO YES Compile (link) . coding) Sequence program input.1. programming/monitoring can be performed during communication with the PMC.c Create sequence program (design. In off–line mode. address map determination. debugging. editing.1.3 Sequence Program Creation 9 .2. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 Start control system development Determine control targets (machine. For details. programming is performed on the OPEN CNC without communication. To overcome this problem. step sequence method programming has been introduced. using the ladder method. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 1. This method was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the processes and is well-suited to the control of entire process.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING] w w w .2. many sequence engineers are already familiar with it.c (1) What is the step sequence method ? The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequence control governed by a programmable controller. [3. The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC.2 Supported PMC Functions for the machines are able to use the step sequence. · The 1st level of ladder · The 2nd level of ladder · The 3rd level of ladder · Subprograms of ladder · Subprograms of step sequence 10 .1 om PMC Programming Method The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequence control governed by a PMC. the larger and the more complicated the sequence program becomes.2.2. For the details of the step sequence method. ce nt e r.1.3. refer to the following manual.5. See 1. this method features the direct representation of the control flow on a flow chart. Since it has been in use for years. Each block of processing is described as a subprogram.3 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM 1.c nc (2) The configuration of a sequence program A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit . And it is hard to describe such program for ladder method. 1.c Sub Program P3 (LADDER) om Sub Program P1 (Step Sequence) Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence) Ladder Editing Package Source program Ladder 1st level Mnemonic Mnemonic program conversion A mnemonic program without nc Ladder 2nd level ce nt e (3) Data flow Ladder 3rd level Subprogram P1 . GENERAL B–62884EN/01 LEVEL 1 ( LADDER) LEVEL 2 ( LADDER) LEVEL 3 ( LADDER) Sub Program P2 (LADDER) r.c Subprogram P2 ↓ Compilation/Decompilation w ↓ Object code w w Memory card format file CNC 11 step sequence . EMS and XMS on personal computer may restrict them.0 r. About Symbol & Comment Data (1) The definition of terms The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between some symbol & comment data. to be used in place of PMC address. 16 byte 16 byte 30 byte Maximum number 20.000 Duplicated definition Not allowed Allowerd nc Specification w w w .000 (Note) (Note) Allowerd Note Free area size of hard disk drive. 12 .0 Y0. and can add notes to a sequence program. internal relays. Display om Terms RELAY X COMMENT Text assigned to coils to explain them.c Relay comment Text assigned relays/coils explain them.0 INPUT X0. to to X0.1.3. Y0. Definition and uses Symbol Name assigned uniquely to each relay/coil.0 ce nt e Coil comment Net comment Text assigned between ladder nets to explain them.c Available characters 20.2 You can assign names or add notes to I/O signals. They are generally called “symbol & comment data”. COIL Y COMMENT HERE IS COIL COMMENT (* HERE IS NET *) (* COMMENT *) (2) Symbol & comment specification list (a) For input signal and internal relay Symbol Relay comment Coil comment ASCII characters (lower-case alphabetic characters not allowed) ASCII characters Japanese kana/kanji characters ASCII characters Japanese kana/kanji characters Maximum cha. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 1.000 entries (Note) 20. GENERAL B–62884EN/01 (b) For ladder sequence program Net comment Available characters ASCII characters Japanese kana/kanji characters Line feed Steps to occupy 2 step/Net comment Maximum characters/line 64 characters/line 4095 characters/Net comment (Note 1) Maximum lines 100 lines/Net commennt (Note 1) Maximum number About 20.000 Net comments (Note 2) Notes om Specification w w w . Free area size of hard disk drive. EMS and XMS on personal computer may further restrict them. 2.1. Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum number of Net comments. 13 .c nc ce nt e r.c 1. The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the Net comment. 2.c om 2 B–62884EN/01 14 . CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE w w w .c nc ce nt e r. an space for storing sequence data is required.c CNC function ce nt e OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Hard disk 5 Mbytes or more space Graphic adapter VGA or higher Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible printers (Note 5) (Note6) Japanese language Input system in conormity with MS-KANJI API input system w w w . FUNUC OPEN CNC CPU 386SX or higher OS · Microsoft Windows 95 (Note 1) · DOS Version 5. Please install the software by the installation procedure described in [2. Moreover. 3 Even if the machine has 640 Kbytes memory. (For DOS : A02B–0207–K706 For Windows : A02B–0207–K726) · Drivers and Librarys (For DOS : A02B–0207–K707 For Windows : A02B–0207–K727) om Computer (Note 2) FANUC OPEN CNC Additional option · EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION (A02B–0207–J800) · Ladder Editing Package Function (A02B–0207–J820) Memory · Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 3) · EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 4) r.3.c nc Notes 1 When using this saftware under Windows95.2. The size of free space in memory can be checked with the DOS command CHKDSK.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/ English system) · DOS Version 5. ] 2 A device driver tailored to the OPEN CNC system configuration must be incorporated. uses a large memory space.3. For details. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 2.0 or later (to activate English system) Device driver · Extended Drivers and Librarys.1 To use this software. 15 .6 Changing the Printer]. Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory specically for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.5. for example. configurations of hardware and software are required as follows. 4 The quantity of EMS and XMS memory effects on the performance to handle Symbol data and Net comment. 6 [NEC PR201H]and[FANUC PRINTER]are also available by changing system file. Please prepare 256 Kbytes or more EMS if possible. at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes. refer to[3. the maximum number of steps which this software can handle may be restricted. 5 In addition.1 Registering the software in the Windows [Programs] menu. the free memory may be less than 520 Kbytes when an installed driver. If neither EMS nor XMS is prepared. 16 . When only conventional memory is used. Although.c (2) Expanded memory for Symbol & Comment data FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data if available. Ladder Editing Package uses conventional memory. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 About size of Expansion memory to be used : Expansion memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as an temporary area. When neither of them are available. Ladder Editing Package runs with no EMS & XMS. Ladder Editing Package uses EMS if available. regardless of the size of the program to be edited. up to 32000 program steps can be created.000 Net coment. ce nt e r.2. If EMS is not available. About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1. up to 21840 program steps can be created. and processing large number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.c nc (3) Expanded memory for Net comment Ladder Editing Package also uses EMS and/or XMS memory. When 256KB EMS memory is available. w w w . om (1) Expansion memory When reading ladder programs. however. or temporary file as same as Symbol & Comment data. Ladder Editing Package will make temporary file on the hard diskdrive. enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance. use hard disk. About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1. The size of EMS is 256KB for all PMC models.000 Symbol data. 44MB).2 PACKAGE CONFIGURATION The Ladder Editing Package is distributed on the five system disks listed below.c nc ce nt e r. Check that none of the system disks is missing.5–inch. These disks are of 3.2)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–2 (3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol. 2HD type (1.4)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–4 w w w .c om (5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–5 17 .1)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–1 (2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol. (1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–3 (4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 2. 3. 1 into drive A. One is to register the software in the Windows [Programs] menu. (2) Click the [Start] button. .c Type the name of a program.c nc SETUP 18 Initializing Setup. . 2. folder. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE 2. Ok Cancel ↓ Browse .1 Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu The following describes the installation of this software from floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C. (4) The message below appears. om INSTALLATION Run [ ? ] [] A: ¥SETUP ce nt e Open : r.The other is to invoke this software from the DOS command prompt. .3 B–62884EN/01 There are two different installaction procedures to install the software... (1) Insert Vol. and the setup program is started. and Windows will open it for you. w w w . then click the [Run…] dialog box.2. (3) Enter “A:¥SETUP” in the [Open] box of the [Run] dialog box. or document. If the OPEN CNC has already been installed in the personal computer. and the dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type of the OPEN CNC to be installed. Ladder Editing Package setup Welcome to Ladder Editing Package. Ladder Editing Package for Type 2 will be installed. Ladder Editing Package setup Interface driver is not detected.2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 (5) Specify the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed (Note). If you want to install these files in a different disk drive.c Continue ce nt e (6) Specify the OPEN CNC interface type. If the detected interface type matches that of the Ladder Editing Package to be installed. select the install disk drive. Ladder Editing Package setup w w w . the dialog box shown below appears. ↓ [] c:[C_DRIVE] Exit Setup r. Install to : om Setup will place system files into the following drive.c nc Interface Type 2 is detected. the installer automatically identifies the interface type. Whitch type Interface driver are you want to use ? ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔ Interface Type F Interface Type 1 f Interface Type 2 Ok 19 Cancel . click [Ok]. Ok Cancel If the OPEN CNC has not yet been installed in the personal computer. Ladder Editing Package setup ÔÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔ Select language of message to be installed. If there is sufficient free space for the installation. After selecting a display color type. nc Ladder Editing Package setup ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ Color type F COLOR f MONO 1 f MONO 2 w . ÔÔÔÔÔ Disk information Ok 7808K 128000K Cancel ce nt e Available space: r. If the colors are displayed correctly.c Required space: C: om Install Language F English only f Japanese only f English and Japanese (8) Select a display color type according to the display unit to be used.2. click [Ok]. click [Test] to check the display appearance. The size of the files to be installed and the amount of free space available on the hard disk to which the software will be installed are displayed. click [Ok].c Select color type. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 (7) Select the language of the messages to be installed. w w Ok 20 Test Cancel . c nc Note The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder Editing Package has been installed cannot be modified. Insert the requested floppy disk. A:¥ Cancel r.2) ce nt e (10)Upon the completion of installation. then click [Ok]. and then press <Enter>.c Ok Floppy disk to be inserted om Disk 2(Ladder Editing Package Vol. Ladder Editing Package setup Please insert the following disk (or type the new directory). the Ladder Editing Package is registered in the [Programs] menu. 21 . w w w . CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 (9) The dialog box shown below appears during installation.2. the dialog box shown below appears. Ok w w w . After checking that the interface type detected by the installer is correct. 1 into drive A. Enter disk drive name to install the Ladder Editing Package: ce nt e Install to Ok C : Quit Fig.3.2. and the dialog box shown below appears. and the title screen appears. (1) Insert Vol.2.c (4) Enter the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed (Note). CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE 2. Select [Continue].3.2 Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt B–62884EN/01 The following describes the installation of the Ladder Editing Package from floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C. 22 . (2) Enter “A:¥INSTALL” at the DOS command prompt. If the OPEN CNC is already installed in the personal computer. Quit Fig. r.c nc (5) Specify an OPEN CNC interface type.2. Ladder Editing Package for Type 1 will be installed. select [Ok]. Select the interface type corresponding to the OPEN CNC to be installed. > A : ¥INSTALL om (3) The installer is started. the interface type is automatically identified by the installer.2(a) Interface Type 1 is detected.3.2(b) If the OPEN CNC is not installed in the personal computer yet. Select color type.2. Select a color option that is appropriate for the display unit.3.3. ce nt e Select language of message to be installed.2(c) Quit om Ok r. F COLOR f MONO1 f MONO2 Ok Fig.2.c nc English only Fig.2.3.2(e) 23 Quit . The dialog box color can be changed by selecting an appropriate display color option with the and keys.2(d) w w w (7) To set the display color. the dialog box shown below appears.2. Which Interface driver will be used? F Interface Type 1 f Interface Type 2 Fig. English and Japanese Japanese only .c (6) Select an installation message language. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 The Interface driver has not been detected. The installation is started. Exit nc Fig.c Yes ce nt e (9) When the installation terminates normally.2(f) w w w . CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 (8) The selected options are displayed.2.c Note The configuration of the installation destination directory cannot be modified. After checking that the desired options are selected. Installation is done. select [Yes]. the message shown below appears.2. Install drive Interface Language : C: ¥FANUC¥LEP : Type 1 : English only om Are you sure to start installation? No r.3. 24 . C:¥FANUC¥LEP PMC0000 : Work directory w w w . A program used on–line is stored under this directory. When the English message option was selected C:¥FANUC¥LEP ENG: English message data for the Ladder Editing Package 25 . but cannot modify the directory name.4 ce nt e According to the message language selection made at installation. The user can freely select the hard disk drive to which installation is to be performed.2. : OPEN CNC system (separate system) : Basic operation package (separate system) CNC BOP (1) Message file directory r. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 C:¥FANUC LEP : Ladder Editing Package system JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder Editing Package system ENG : English message data for the Ladder Editing Package system om DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION The Ladder Editing Package is installed by the installer under the directory configuration indicated below. the installer creates the subdirectories listed below to enable the installation of the message files. When the Japanese and English message option was selected C:¥FANUC¥LEP JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder Editing Package ENG: English message data for the Ladder Editing Package (2) Work directory As a work directory. and can be edited off–line. a. When the Japanese message option was selected C:¥FANUC¥LEP JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder Editing Package c. the following subdirectory is created automatically.c nc b.c 2. This setting cannot be omitted. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE 2. refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG. (b) EMM386.SYS This device driver enables the use of MS–KANJI API for Japanese–language input. see DOSIME.c om (1) When the system is used under Windows 95 (when Windows 95 is installed in C:¥WINDOWS) DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥ANSI.) DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥ANSI. For details of the installation method.EXE DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIME.EXE This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. only the DOS–version Japanese input system can be used.SYS DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIMEK.5 B–62884EN/01 To use the system.SYS (a) ANSI. When using another EMS driver.SYS r.SYS. The DOS version Japanese input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command.SYS DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥EMM386.BAT under the COMMAND directory of Windows and DOSIME.SYS file. DOS is already installed in C:¥DOS. The specification method depends on the Japanese input system being used. Additions or modifications to the settings of the Windows Japanese input system can be made by modifying the Language item of Keyboard Properties. When using the system from the MS–DOS prompt.SYS file. (c) MSIME.SYS.SYS/MSIMEK. refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG. after double–clicking the Keyboard icon on the Control Panel. CONFIG. both the Japanese input system registered in Windows and that of the DOS version can be used.SYS (required) The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. 26 . When using another Japanese language input system.EXE When the system is used under Windows 95.SYS under the root directory of the start–up disk. w w w .c nc ce nt e (2) When the system is used under DOS (In the following example.SYS DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥EMM386. the Japanese input system is not specified in the CONFIG. In MS–DOS mode.2. make the following modifications to the CONFIG. The specification of switches and parameters may be required for the above settings.SYS is specified. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 w w w .SYS. 2 When using a memory card. For details.c om Notes 1 All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with Windows 95/MS–DOS. If a problem is anticipated. 27 .SYS. specify only ANSI.c nc ce nt e r. Ladder Editing Package will support only English. Omit the specification of the other device drivers. 3 Some device drivers may adversely affect the Ladder Editing Package.SYS in CONFIG. refer to the windows 95/the MS–DOS on–line help or the relevant manual.2. When only ANSI. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix G. but allows any contention with other device drivers to be identified quickly. refer to the manual provided with the memory card for details of the setting required in CONFIG. Such files are not handled by the user.3.5.5.9. (b) *. SYM · FS0T-CNV. see Section 3.PR (b) Standard symbols (For details.JPN/*.c om 2.2.5.DAT · CROSSINF.TXT contains Japanese text. (a) Printing (For details.6. see Appendix E. SYM · PM-D. see Section 3. These files are listed below.) ce nt e r.INF (b) Communications (For details.4.6. These files are listed below.ESC · AMROFTRP.) · AMROFTRP. which can be directly edited by the user.ERR The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are written into this text file. (a) Printing (For details.TXT/READMEJ.CNF (d) Entire system · FLMNE.TXT contains English text.SYM · PM-H.DAT (For details.1 w w w .) · AMROFTRP. File System (1) Customizable files Some functions can be customized by the user.3.5.5.5. (d) *.6 FILE CONFIGURATION The files constituting system are described below.TXT These text files contain important information that became available after the manual was printed.) · FLIO_AT. and communication port setting based on the RS-232C standard.ENG A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the messages (menus. For these functions.5. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 2.DAT (For details.SYM · FS0M-CNV. see Section 3. see Section 3.7. displayed instructions. The location of such a file is described in Section 2. (c) FLMNE. the associated data is held in text-format files.1.3. SYM · PM-C_CNV. and error indications) to be displayed or printed by the system.) · OPTION. while README.7.) · FLVIEW. Use this information in combination with the manual.DAT · *. Note that READMEJ.8.EXE A file having this extension is an executable file. These functions include setting of the format for printing created ladder programs. (3) Files that are not installed The files under subdirectory ¥APPENDIX on Volume 5 are not installed by the installer.c nc (2) Other files (a) README. see Section 3.) · F16&18-M.6. SYM · F16&18-T. SYM 28 . see Section 3.DAT (c) Compile/decompile (For details. J in case of named “C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE” as source program SAMPLE¥ (Note 1) (Note 1) Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file (Note 2) Message data file I/O module data file 1st level ladder data file 2nd level ladder data file 3rd level ladder data file (Note 3) Sub-program ladder data file (Note 4) Sub-program step sequence data file(Note 4) Net comment data file (Note 2) Memory card format data file nc ce nt e · CONTROL · SYSPARAM · TITLE · XSYMBOL. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE B–62884EN/01 (c) Message conversion tools (For details. which is object of editing and printing. Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder. 4. 3. is called source program and managed by storing in files below. ”zzz” is number of sub-program. 2. These files are stored under the directory one level above the source program storage directory.MAP om C:¥ Notes w w w .xxx · MCARD execution result file map file r.c 1.6. Contain source program compile/decompile results and map information.2 The Constitution of Source Program A sequence program.xxx · MESSAGE · IOMODULE · LEVEL1.2. 29 . see Appendix F. #SS · NETCMT.ERR · SAMPLE. but are named in accordance with the name of the source program. ”yyy”. These files are not included in a source program.c data¥ · SAMPLE. #LA · LEVEL3. #LA · Pyyy. ”xxx” is number of multi file managing.) · _CHGMES. #LA · Pzzz. #LA · LEVEL2.EXE 2. c om 3 B–62884EN/01 30 .c nc ce nt e r. OPERATION OPERATION w w w .3. then start the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command line. 2 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from Windows (1) To start the system software of the Ladder Editing Package when the package is installed under Windows. first terminate Windows. (2) Key in “FLADDER Enter . 31 . ce nt e (3) The on–line functions are activated as soon as the Ladder Editing Package is started.” A : ¥>C : Enter C : ¥>CD ¥FANUC¥LEP Enter Enter r. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3. DOS prompt Start (command name FLADDER) On–line functions Off–line functions End nc End w w w . double–click the corresponding icon. the Ladder Editing Package will not operate normally if the package is started from the Windows DOS prompt. Once the Ladder Editing Package has been started. If “Interface Type 1” is selected at installation.1 STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE 1 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command line (1) Move to the drive and directory where the system software of the Ladder Editing Package is installed. the on–line functions are activated.c C : ¥FANUC¥LEP>FLADDER om Example:Starting the Ladder Editing Package when the package is installed under the ¥FANUC¥LEP directory of drive C.c Note If “Interface Type 1” is selected at installation. c End? YES Termination of Ladder Editing Package w w Fig.SYS and AUTOEXEC.5 for an explanation of off–line function menu selection. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (Reference) OPEN CNC.BAT) om Install DOS/Windows ce nt e Install extended driver/library disk or driver library disk installation.1 Flow of Operations Required to Start the Ladder Editing Package 3 Terminating the Ladder Editing Package The Ladder Editing Package can be terminated in either of the following two ways. Ladder Editing Package. DOS/Windows. (2) Select [Exit] from the off–line function menu.c Incorporate device driver (Modification of CONFIG.File] of the on–line functions. See Section 3. 32 . and incorporate driver Install Ladder Editing Package Start Ladder Editing Package nc Operate Ladder Editing Package NO w . extended driver/library r. (1) Select [Exit] from the pull–down menu for [1.3.4 for an explanation of on–line function menu selection.3. See Section 3. 2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION 3.2.3. 3.3.c 4 (1) See Fig.1(b) ce nt e MS–DOS Exit om Menu Structure 33 .1(a) Menu Structure (1) w w w .2.c On–line function Off–line function 2 Ladder monitoring/On–line editing Signal trigger/Ladder debug Signal status Timer Counter PMC parameter Keep relay PMC alarm status Data table control PMC status Data table RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System information Diagnose nc 3 I/O Communication Load program Store program Backup program Communication Fig.2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.1 The menu screens displayed by the system are structured as shown below. Start 1 Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter File r. 1(b) Menu Structure (2) 34 .c (1) B–62884EN/01 w w w .3. OPERATION F1 Title EDIT F2 Title PRINT F3 COMPILE F4 DECOMPILE F5 I/O F6 F8 F9 MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY ON–LINE FUNCTION Source program → mnemonic file Mnemonic file → source program Execute user batch files Dos Floadat View result Linker END nc F10 Parameter Symbol Ladder diagram Step sequence I/O module Message Cross reference list Bit address map FA writer PMC writer PMC Handy File Memory card Backup ROM format file ce nt e PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP F7 Ladder diagram/ Step sequence Symbol & comment Message I/O module System parameter om Off–line function r.2.3.c Fig. The escape key terminates the current screen then returns the display to the previous screen in the menu hierarchy. PMC–RB3 w w w Main menu Item name PMC Model <O> [C : ¥FLADDER ] Current directory name Edit mode (Overwrite/insert) Note The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the descriptions of this manual. When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen. the second Shift key together ce nt e or subsequent cursor can be moved by pressing the with the or key. and are used to move the r. the user can select the desired menu item by pressing the corresponding function key. . (5) [INS] key This key switches between the overwrite mode <O> and insert mode <I>. COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS (1) Function keys When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video. (3) Cursor keys . (4) Scroll keys The scroll keys Page Down and Page Up display the next page and the previous page. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. press Tab key and select one button. nc (6) [TAB] key When multipul keys are displayed.3 The operations described below are common operations.c The cursor keys cursor to select input items. . 1 EDIT 2 PRINT [F1] 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP 5 [F2] [F3] [F4] I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT 8 UTILTY [F5] [F6] [F7] 9 ONLINE 10 END [F8] [F9] [F10] The escape key Esc om (2) Escape key has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. (8) Pop–up menu When the following pop–up menu appears. .c (7) Status line A status line is displayed at the top of the screen. 35 . depending on the personal computer used.3. the desired process can be selected using any of the three methods described below. respectively. Q . ce nt e respectively. the following menu bar is displayed along the top of the screen 2.) key displays the pull–down menu for I1.3. The target screen is displayed by pressing the positioning the highlight to a desired menu item. I/O 4.c Pressing the Alt 3. or Append command. Diagnose 3. File The pull–down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing the Alt I1. Communication File save Exit Using the cursor keys. press the corresponding function key. function name Icon for PMC status indication (See the section explaning how to start the on– line functions. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 The file already exists. In the above case. or A can select the Update. (9) Pull–down menus On some screens.c 2) Function key A function key is indicated at the left of each item. pressing the letter key U . Enter key selects that item. A menu item with an arrow mark ( ) at its right edge has its own pull–down menu. F1 F2 F3 Update Quit Append 1) Cursor movement or To select an item. which can be displayed by pressing the key. I/O 4. Diagnose nc I1. Quit. Communication Function number. position the highlight to the desired item on a function’s pull–down menu. press the cursor key . 36 Enter key after . 3) Command name An uppercase letter in (usually. Then. 2. such that the item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. File w w w . File key and the corresponding function number simultaneously. om pressing the r. To select an item. the initial of) an item name is the command name. c <When a mismatch is found> Sequence program (RAM) – Program load operation – Program store operation 4) w – Continuation or end 3) w 3) Ladder monitoring 4) On–line functions Sequence program (RAM) 3) 4) w – Diagnosis – I/O (Program load/store. .1. Ladder Editing Package 1) Starting the Ladder Editing Package PMC nc 2) Loading programs from the PMC (automatic) [When programs have already been loaded] A comparison is automatically made between the PMC programs and those which have already been loaded. display. writing to F–ROM) – Communication (with the PMC) – Off–line function selection File – Relay comment – Net comment Fig. [Menu structure] Outline r. ce nt e (3) [3. the user can display the PMC status and perform editing for PMC status display. the user can write programs to and read programs from the PMC. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3.I/O] menu With this menu. (2) [2. the user can write to and read from a file on hard disk or floppy disk. the user can establish communications for PMC status display and PMC operation.4.1 Overview of the On–Line Functions 3.3. and terminate processing.Diagnose] menu With this menu.Communication] menu With this menu.1.c (1) [1. switch between functions.File] menu With this menu.4.1 Overview of On–Line Functions 37 Power ON Sequence program (F–ROM) .4 ON–LINE FUNCTIONS 3. (4) [4.1 om The on–line functions are used to perform ladder and signal status monitoring.4. and modification on the OPEN CNC screen. the following message is displayed. Memory card format file has been updated. Source program has updated. see Appendix B. For details. 38 . For an explanation of on–line function selection in off–line mode. (b) Work program decompilation If a source program that was acquired with the off–line I/O function has not yet been decompiled.4. follow the procedure given below. see Section 3. see the related section.c om (1) Moving to the ladder monitoring screen To move from an on–line function to the ladder monitoring screen. For details.4. Alternatively. Compile it ? (Y/N) If an on–line function is to be used for an edited program.1.c nc ce nt e r.4. the use of the on–line functions can be selected in off–line mode.2 Starting the On–Line Functions The use of the on–line functions is automatically enabled when the system is started.5. (a) Work program compilation If a source program that was edited off–line has not yet been compiled. enter Y. w w w . On the ladder monitoring screen. the following message appears. Subprogram selection ↓ Ladder monitor screen display Each screen is explained below.5.4.1. see Appendix B. select the desired function from the pull–down menu or press the corresponding function key. – Program store operation ↓ 5) Ladder monitoring Subprogram screen display (automatic) See Section ↓ 3.4. – Program load operation See Section 3. (started only when required) ↓ See Section 3.2.3. 3) Communication with the PMC (automatic) ↓ 4) Monitoring method selection (started only when required) See Section 3.3.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. enter Y. [Moving to the ladder monitoring screen] Reference section 1) Starting the system/on–line function selection 2) Work program compilation/decompilation See Appendix B.4.1. For details. Decompile it ? (Y/N) If an on–line function is to be used for a program acquired with the I/O function. 1. File 2..3.3.c Try to connect with PMC . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (c) Communication with the PMC Selecting “ON–LINE FUNCTION” causes the online monitor screen (“SET COMMUNICATION” dialog box) to appear as shown below. [CONTINUE] : The ladder monitor screen appears. I/O 4. Diagnose 3.1. 0000 0000 ce nt e F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Setting Fig. Communication Status om Communication Start Cancel r. the dialog box shown below appears. 39 . the program is compared with that held on the PMC. [END] : The on–line function terminates. Select a desired function. but the program already on the PMC is not replaced.. [LOAD] : A program is loaded from PMC memory and the program is overwritten. Note that ladder monitor display is not performed correctly. [STORE] : The program is stored to the PMC. The program replaces the program already on the PMC.c nc (d) Selecting a monitoring method When communication with the PMC starts normally. If the programs do not match.4.2 (a) w w w . Communication with the PMC starts automatically. This occurs. the dialog box does not appear. Store Store to PMC program memory. for example.4.3. om Load r. Instead.1. the subprogram selection screen appears immediately. the “SET COMMUNICATION” dialog box closes automatically and the “LOAD FROM PMC” dialog box is opened in its place.3.2 (b) w w w .4. (e) Loading from the PMC After communication with the PMC starts normally. When the on–line monitor function is started for a program that is loaded or stored.c nc Note If the program does not match the program on the PMC the dialog box shown above appears. Load Program Transfer data type F LADDER f ALL 100% 0% Exec Abort Fig. ce nt e Fig. Load from PMC program memory. when a single program is modified by means of off–line editing. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 N : E–3160 Selected program is not same. Disregard Qiut Disregard difference.3.2 (c) 40 Cancel .c Quit On –Line function.1. File 2. 3) The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.4.2 (d) (2) Displaying the PMC status (icon) The on–line function indicates the current PMC statuses. Diagnose 3. Communication 1) Fig.c nc P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) Displayed position of icon 1. Enter r.c or key. the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box for the ladder monitor function appears.1. using icons at the right end of the status line.4.3. ce nt e Sub–program list LEVEL 1 LEVEL2 P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1 P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1 PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2 Ok Cancel Fig.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (f) Displaying the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box (Ladder monitor function) Once a program is loaded from the PMC. (a) Display positions and types of icons w w w .1. Specify the subprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as described below: om Note The on–line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported. I/O 4.3. [Operation] 1) Position the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the 2) Press the key.2 (e) 41 2) 3) . 1.3.c nc Program on PMC is running. .2 (f) ce nt e r. Program on PMC is stopped.2 (h) 42 Communication is not active.4.2 (g) 3) PMC communication status The following icon indicates whether a communication link with the PMC is established.3. Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC om Gray : Alarm not exists on PMC Fig.3.c 2) Ladder execution status The following icon indicates whether a ladder program is running.4.3.4. Fig. w .1.1. Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1) PMC alarm status The following icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarm state. w w Communication is active. 1. (a) Select [Exec] PMC parameter is saved and the dialog box closes.2. To use this function while running a ladder program. turn the CNC to EDIT mode. It is possible to change the saving directory and the file name.4.3. specify the saving file name.4. If not running.1 (a) (2) Dialog box view Save PMC parameter — File name nc C:\DATA\PMC_PRM w w w .c Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter Off-Line Function MS DOS Exit Fig.4. and select [Save PMC parameter] on the menu.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.1 (b) (3) Operation At first.2.c 0% 100% Exec Abort Execute saving Abort saving Input a saving file name.3. (c) Select [Cancel] PMC parameter is not saved and the dialog box closes. ce nt e r. (b) Select [abort] (during a file saving) Saving is stopped.2.4. File om (1) Menu position Pull down [1.2 File 3. 43 .1 Saving PMC Parameter While communicating with PMC. PMC parameters can be saved to a file. you can use this function at any time.File] menu. Cancel Close dialog box Fig. ‘PMC_PRM’ is initially displayed as a default file name. If not running. To use this function while running a ladder program. While communicating with PMC.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (4) Message Message File already exists.2. Select [No] to cancel saving. you can use this function at any time. and select [Restore PMC parameter] on the menu. turn the CNC to EMERGENCY STOP and set PWE(CNC parameter) to “1” on the CNC.2. PMC parameters can be restored from a file.4.3. Select [Yes] to overwrite.3. It is possible to change the restoring directory and the file name.File] menu.2 (b) (3) Operation At first.2 Meaning and countermeasure Same file name exists. 44 . ce nt e 1. File Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter Off-Line Function MS DOS Exit Fig. specify a restoring file name.c File name C:\DATA\PMC_PRM 0% 100% Abort Exec Execute restoring Abort restoring Input a restoring file name.c (1) Menu position Pull down [1.2.4. Overwrite? 3.4.“PMC_PRM” is initially displayed as a default file name. Cancel Close dialog box Fig. om Restoring PMC Parameter r.2 (a) nc (2) Dialog box view — Restore PMC parameter w w w . w 1. File ce nt e Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter Off-Line Function MS DOS Exit Fig.4.3 3. (b) Select [Abort] (during a file saving) Restoring is stopped. om 3. File] menu. then select MS–DOS. For details.3. MS–DOS . and select [Off-Line Function] on the menu.2.3.5 Off-Line Function”.) The user can return to on–line mode by executing the EXIT command from the MS–DOS prompt. (1) Menu position To use “Off-Line Function”. File w w Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter Off-Line Function MS DOS Exit Fig.4.4.c nc (1) Menu position To use MS–DOS.File] from the pull–down menu. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (a) Select [Exec] PMC parameter is restored and the dialog box closes. see “3.3 1.4 45 .4.4 An MS–DOS command can be executed without terminating on–line mode. select [1.2. (c) Select [Cancel] PMC parameter is not restored and the dialog box closes.c Selecting Off–Line Function from On–Line Function The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. r. pull down [1. (The MS–DOS prompt appears.2.2.3. And the following dialog box appears.3.2.2.2. 2) When there are any modifications which have not been Yes No Fig.4.5(b) preserved by F7 [UPDATE] on the online editor.3.4. Exit (1) Menu position Pull down [1.2.5(c) [Yes]: The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-Line Function ends. 1.4.c nc (3) Operation (a) Push [OK] button. [No] : Cancel to [Exit]. this “File save” operation is canceled. 46 .5(a) ce nt e (2) Dialog box view Are you sure you want to exit ? Ok Cancel Fig.3. and select [Exit] on the menu.c Fig.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.4. File] menu. File om Save PMC parameter Restore PMC parameter Off-Line Function MS DOS Exit r. 1) Online function ends. Ladder diagram has been modified Sure to quit ? w w w .5 This function is used to finish On-Line Function. Diagnose om for “Ladder Monitor” /“Online Editor” window for “Signal status” window for sub-menu of “PMC Parameter” windows for “PMC alarm message” dialog box for “PMC Status” window for “RUN/STOP the program” dialog box for “Signal Trace” dialog box for “Signal Analysis” dialog box for “System Information” dialog box r. For [Ladder Monitor].4.3. signal statuses are indicated as shown below. select [2.4. On the ladder monitor screen. Diagnose] to display a pull-down menu. Ladder Monitor 3.1 ce nt e To select the ladder monitor screen. 1) Displaying signal statuses STATUS : OFF (Thin line) w STATUS : ON w w (Thick line) 47 .1.1 . then select [Ladder Monitor].3.3. both the ladder monitor function and on-line edit function can be used.c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information 3.4. Diagnose 2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.c nc Ladder monitor (a) Configuration of the ladder monitor screen The ladder monitor screen is shown below. Diagnose] menu contains the menu items as shown below.3 [2. c nc Cursor movement Moving the cursor up or down Moving the cursor to the beginning of the ladder program Home Moving the cursor to the end of the ladder program End Moving the cursor to the previous page Moving the cursor to the next page SpList Listing subprograms and F7 : [SpList] selecting a subprogram (c) Search Searching for data (d) F8 : [Search] Entering the search data Shift + F8 (d) Symbol Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol] comment defined at a specified address (e) Setting Switching between ladder F10 : [Setting] monitor and on-line editing.c F7 F8 F9 F10 SpList Search Symbol Seting S+F8 S–Set Fig. Diagnose [LEVEL1] D000 D000 3.3.0 om SUB 1 END1 SUB 2 END2 SUB END 64 + ce nt e Shift r.3.1(a) (b) Ladder monitor function The table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor function. Communication Ladder Monitor !!!!!!!!!!!!!! Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information NET 00001–00006 R0000. I/O 4. switching between symbol display and comment display (f) 48 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1.1.4. File ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ Ô ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ Ô ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ 2. Operation group Function Key to be used Reference w w w .3.1 R0000. 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList]) A ladder program is monitoried and edited in units of subprograms.1. The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.3. r.1. 1) Subprogram list display screen Pressing F7 [SpList] causes a window to be displayed. Page Down keys then the Enter key. MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1 Symbol Fig.4.1(c) 49 ÔÔ ÔÔ PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND Coil comment .1(b) 2) Display information The following information appears on the subprogram screen. Ladder (No mark) Step Sequence (S mark) ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔ ÔÔ LEVEL 1 LEVEL2 P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1 P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) Sub–program No.4.c nc P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2 Ok Cancel Fig.3. This function is uesd to list existing subprograms and to select the subporgram to be displayed. Note om The on–line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not supported.3. Select the program to be displayed by pressing a cursor Page Up .3. as shown below.c key or the Sub–program list ce nt e LEVEL 1 LEVEL2 P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1 P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1 S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE) PUT DOWN A WORK P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2 w w w . 0”+ Searching for a symbol: F8 “symbol” + F8 ce nt e Example) “SYMBOL1”+ F8 D Functional instruction number/name Searching for a number: “S”+“functional– instruction–number”+ Example) “S1”+ F8 F8 Searching for a name: “functional–instruction– nc name” + Example) “END1”+ w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data ( F8 Shift + ) 1) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH]) A search for a net starts when the key is pressed after the F8 search data has been entered. press the change the setting. ”Entering search data” (see (b)). To repeatedly search for identical data.c F8 Example) “X0000.c D Net number: 2) Entering search data ( F8 F8 “net–number”+ Example) “10”+ Shift + F8 F8 F8 ) Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 1). can be registered. If the F8 key is pressed without specifying any search data. described above. Tab key.3. as described below: D Address/symbol Searching for an address: “address” + r. To . use this function. the following dialog box appears. press the 50 or key. A search can be made for several types of data. a om search is made for the data set specified in 2) below. To position the cursor to another item. While this function is active. 4. the following dialog box appears.3. symbol. D SYMBOL : The symbol at the specified address is appears. Symbol & Comment Display Address [ Symbol F9 ] Relay Comment [ ] ] Coil Comment ] [ Cancel Fig. (e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL]) This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified nc address.3. net number.1.1. 51 .4. D RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specified address appears.1(d) ce nt e D SEARCH DATA Enter the search data: address.3. When .1(e) D ADDRESS : Enter the address of the symbol or comment to be displayed.3.3. D COIL COMMENT : The coil comment at the specified address appears. without S) D DATA TYPE Select the type of the search data.c w [ OK w w is pressed. functional instruction name. 0 Cancel r. functional instruction number (number only.c OK om Data Kind F ADDR/SYMBOL f WRT–COIL f FUNCTION f NET–NO Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Search Search Data : X0000. the dialog box shown below appears: r. see (2). press the or key.c When the om (f) Setting a function (F10 [SET]) This function includes the following: D LADDER MODE: Switching between ladder monitor and on–line editing. To change key.4. press the Tab Display setting Ladder Mode F Ladder Monitor f Signal Trigger f Online Editor f Debug Ladder Function Paramareter V Display w .c nc Symbol & Comment Display F Symbol f Address f Relay Comment f Symbol & Address f Relay Comment & Address f Relay Comment & Symbol w w Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 F10 key is pressed. and relay comment. “On–line editing” in this section. For details of the on–line function.1. D SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY: Selecting the address display mode in ladder monitoring or on–line editing Three types of data can be displayed: address. symbol.3. D FUNCTION PARAMETER: Selecting whether the parameters of functional instructions are to be displayed To move the cursor to another item. ce nt e the setting.3.3.1(f) 52 OK Cancel . then press F10 : [Setting].2(a) w w w .3. On–line editing Display setting F Online Editor f Debug Ladder r.c Symbol & Comment Display F Symbol f Address f Relay Comment f Symbol & Address f Relay Comment & Address f Relay Comment & Symbol om Ladder Mode f Ladder Monitor f Signal Trigger ce nt e Function Paramareter V Display OK Cancel Fig.1. The “Display setting” dialog box appears. Diagnose] pull–down menu. select [Ladder monitor] from the [2.3. In the dialog box.1.3.3.2 To select the “Online Editor” screen. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. select [Online Editor].4.4.c nc (a) Configuration of the on–line edit screen The configuration of the on–line edit screen is as shown below: 53 . 3.c w w F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Functn Update Search Symbol Seting S+F7 Undo S+F8 S–SET + C+F1N etIns w F4 + S+F1 Ctrl F2 C+F2L C+F3 C+F4 inIns ElmIns Select C+F5 Cut C+F6 Copy C+F7 paste Fig.1 X0000. I/O 4. Communication Online Editor [LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006 X0000.c SUB 2 END2 F1 Shift F3 (S) S+F2 S+F3 (R) nc .0 Y0000. Diagnose 3. If the display of an address and a contact or coil is selected. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1.3.0 SUB 1 END1 SUB END 64 ←(*1) ce nt e X0000. File 2.4.2 (R) om X0001.1 Y0000.2(b) 1) Key input line display(*1) The most recently entered contact or coil is displayed.1. (b) On–line editing On–line editing operations (1) Operation group Input mode modification Function Key to be used Insert mode Enabling/Cancelling Insert Insert mode Enabling/Cancelling Delete Contact/coil input (C) 1) (C) 2) input (d) 1) F1 54 Reference .1 Y0000.3.0 r. pressing the Enter key causes a single contact or coil to be set in the ladder diagram.2 (S) X0001.0 X0000.2 Y0000. F3 (d) 7) r. element insertion ” input (e) 2) F5 “ “ ” ” deletion Delete mode + F4 Delete mode + F5 deletion (e) 2) Inserting a net Ctrl Inserting a line Ctrl Inserting a element Cut and paste Specifying a range function + + F1 (f) 2) (f) 3) + F3 Ctrl + F4 Ctrl + F5 Ctrl + F6 Ctrl + F7 Copying a net Pasting a net (f) 1) F2 Ctrl Cutting a net 55 (e) 1) (g) 1) (g) 2) (g) 3) (g) 4) .3.c Line deletion Net. line.c Selecting a contact/coil om F3 Shift + ce nt e Changing an address “address” + only Tab (d) 8) Enter Entering a contact/coil (d) 9) Enter Functional Entering a instruction input instruction functional functional– (d) 10) instruction–number + Line connection “ ” F6 input (e) 1) F4 nc “ w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Operation group Function Contact/coil input Key to be used input Shift + Reference (d) 2) F1 input (d) 3) F2 input Shift + (d) 4) F2 input (S) (d) 5) input (R) (d) 6) Shift + Tab . When nothing is displayed. The current input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. “Ladder monitor. 2) Delete mode Key : Delete Function : When the line connect function is used in this mode. “Ladder monitor.c Moving the cursor to the previous page Reference om Cursor movement Key to be used F7 : [UPDATE] Restoring the ladder program to the state existing prior to editing Shift + (i) 2) F7 (c) Changing the input mode To change the input mode on the edit screen. Cancel : Press the Insert key in insert mode. use the following keys. Moving the cursor to the left or right . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 On–line editing operations (2) Operation group Function Moving the cursor up or down .3.c Others w (h) 5) Page Up Shift w (h) 2) Home Entering the search data w (h) 1) r. “Ladder monitor. 1) Insert mode Key : Insert Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode.data at the cursor position is deleted. Moving the cursor to the beginning of the ladder program Moving the cursor to the end of the ladder program Moving the cursor to the next page Search (h) 3) (h) 4) End Searching for data Page Down F8 : [Search] ce nt e + F8 (h) 6) See (1). 56 .” Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol] comment defined at a specified address See (1). it indicates that overwrite mode is selected (default).” Setting Switching between F10 :[Setting] ladder monitor and on–line editing.” Updating the ladder program (i) 1) nc Symbol .the contact or coil is inserted at the cursor position. switching between symbol display and comment display. etc. See (1). (d) Input Contact/Coil To input a contact or coil. F2 (S) Key : F3 Function : Set An addressed at the input line. F1 3) Set Key : F2 nc Function : Set An addressed at the input line. Key : om The registered element is added to the ladder diagram. is input to the key input line by entering (S) (S) an address and pressing the 6) Set Shift F3 key. An addressed is input to the key input line by entering 2) Set : Shift + F1 ce nt e Key key.3.c 4) Set Key : Shift + F2 Function : Set An addressed at the input line. is input to the key input line by entering an address and pressing the key. F2 w w w . An addressed is input to the key input line by entering an address and pressing the Shift and keys. The following keys are used for this operation: [Keys used for registration] 1) Set F1 Function : Set at the input line. register the input element in the key input line. is input to the key input line by entering an address and pressing the 5) Set and keys. is input to the key input line by entering an address and is pressing the 57 Shift and F3 keys. F1 r. then press the Enter key.c an address and pressing the Function : Set at the input line. . (R) Key : Shift Function : Set An addressed + (R) (R) F3 at the input line. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Cancel : Press the Delete key in delete mode. The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.c [ om The contacts and coils are displayed in the order indicated below: ÁÁ (S) ] [ ÁÁ (R) ] 8) Change address only : ‘address’+ Enter w w w . + Shift Tab Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line. 2) Entering “|” Key : F5 Function : A vertical line is entered to the right of the cursor position. + Shift changes reverse. delete Contact/Coil or horizontal line. If in the delete mode. [Input Key] 9) Input Contact/Coil Key : Enter Function : Write Contact/Coil which is set at input line to ladder diagram. Tab ] [ ] [ ] ce nt e [ [ ] / r. a vertical line is deleted.3. (e) Connect/delete line 1) Input ‘___’ Key : F4 Function : Input horizontal line. In delete mode.c nc Key Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing input line. 58 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 7) Select Contact/Coil Key : Tab . Tab changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the forward direction. 2) Cutting a net Key : Ctrl + F5 [Cut] Function : Cuts a net. (SEL is displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. w w w . 2) Inserting a line Key : Ctrl + F2 [Lilns] Key : Ctrl + F3 om Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the cursor is positioned. line. The range is specified by means of the following procedure: i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desired range. When a net range is specified. 4) Pasting a net Key : Ctrl + F7 [Paste] Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied and saved into the buffer. 59 . the specified range is copied.) iii) Position the cursor to the last net in the desired range.3. or element 1) Inserting a net Key : Ctrl + F1 [Netlns] Function : Inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursor position. Cutting and copying of a specified net range is explained in 2) or 3) below. Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (f) Inserting a net. : Press the Ctrl and F4 keys in range mode. The cut portion is saved in the buffer for subsequent pasting. 3) Inserting an element [Elmlns] (g) Cut and paste function 1) Specifying a range : Ctrl + F4 [Select] ce nt e Key r. When a net range is specified. the specified net range is cut. 3) Copying a net Key : Ctrl + F6 [Copy] Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting.c nc ii) Press the Cancel Ctrl and F4 keys.c Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position. Function : Up/Down cursor. 6) Next page Key : Page Down Function : Go to the next page.c the left end of the screen. the ladder program on the PMC is modified. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (h) Cursor 1) Move cursor Up/Down Key : .3. the cursor moves one line below and left end. Before executing this function. the cursor moves to one line above and right end. check whether modification of the ladder program is permitted. (i) Others 1) Update Key : F7 Function : Update the modification to the ladder diagram on PMC. When press screen scrolls. 2) Move cursor to Left/Right Key : . When pressing at the right ce nt e end of the screen. Note When the [UPDATE] function is used. 4) Move cursor to the bottom of ladder Key : End nc Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder. the screen scrolls.c Key : Page Up Function : Go to the previous page.bottom of the screen. the om screen or press at the top of the Function : Move cursor to the left/light. 5) Previous page w w w . 3) Move to the top of ladder Key : Home Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder. At the top. When pressing at r. 60 . at the bottom of the screen. c 3. And the signal state of the ladder can be confirmed. r.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Undo Key : Shift + F7 Function : Restore ladder diagram just before the last update F7 .3. Display setting Ladder Mode f Ladder Monitor F Signal Trigger f Online Editor f Debug Ladder Function Paramareter V Display w w w .c nc Symbol & Comment Display F Symbol f Address f Relay Comment f Symbol & Address f Relay Comment & Address f Relay Comment & Symbol 61 OK Cancel .1. ce nt e (2) Operations (a) Selection of Signal Trigger Screen Please select “Signal Trigger” of Ladder Mode by “Displaying setting” dialog (F10 key) of the Ladder Monitor screen.3 om Note Applying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editing since the last update to be lost.4. Signal trigger function (1) Outline of Signal Trigger Function The ladder monitor display is stopped when the specified signal changes. 3.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ” Stop time COUNT:Trigger checking count (default 1) ADR: Trigger setting address ON:Rising edge detection OFF:Falling edge detection Fig.0 : 0 : 65535/65535 ÔÔ F1 Exec F2 F3 Trgsrc Trgprm Stop F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol seting ce nt e [Display of setting trigger] * 1996/05/07 15:00:00 r. Communication Signal Trigger [LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006 X0000.4.5 ” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000. Diagnose 3.c nc POINT:Trigger checking point (default 0) 0 – the top of the 1st level (Default) 1 – after END1 execution 2 – after END2 execution 3 – after END3 execution 62 .7 Y0065.5 X0000.3.0 X0010.3 R0900. w w w .1 X0000.7 ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ SUB 1 END1 SUB 2 END2 * MODE:ON : X0000.2 om X0012.3 (a) Screen of Signal Trigger Function (b) Setting of signal trigger parameter “Trigger Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing the F3“Trgprm”.6 Y0000.c TRIGGER Y0014. I/O 4.4 X0000.1 COMM ENT– G0500.0 X0000.3 X0000. File 2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1.2 X0000.3.1. parameter and the display data are initialized. Please select [OK] when setting is completed.Srch”.Screen of Signal Trigger Function. nc .) 2) Check Point: Trigger check point LEVEL1(Default) the top of the 1st level (Default) END1 after END1 execution END2 after END2 execution END3 after END3 execution 3) Count: Trigger count(1 to 65535) 4) Trigger Mode: Trigger condition ON Rising edge detection OFF Falling edge detection When [Init] is selected.3. Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel setting.3.3.c 65535 Count om X1000.0 Address OK Init Please set the following items by “Trigger Parameter” dialog. The instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied is displayed in blue.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [Trigger Parameter DIALOG] Trigger Parameter Check–Point F Level1 f END1 f END2 f END3 ce nt e Trigger–Mode f ON F OFF r. (d) Search of the instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied Please press F2“T.1. 1) Address: Trigger address (Symbol is possible.c w w w Cancel 63 . (c) Starting or stopping signal trigger function Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig.3 (a). Avoid using this function if personnel are present near the machine. (2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.3.4. (Optionally. the machine may act unpredictably.) (6) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing one scan. and specified block). Step Operations are to execute ladder by specified step (single instruction. a scan counter can be specified. Display setting Ladder Mode f Ladder Monitor f Signal Trigger f Online Editor F Debug Ladder Symbol & Comment Display F Symbol f Address f Relay Comment f Symbol & Address f Relay Comment & Address f Relay Comment & Symbol Function Paramareter V Display 64 OK Cancel . Step Operations and Stop Operations listed below are possible. (5) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder by a trigger of signal condition. single net. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3. If this function is applied incorrectly. (Optionally. (3) Step Operation to execute from current position to specified contact or coil instruction.4 (1) Outline of function Using this function.c nc (2) Operations (a) Selection of Ladder Debugging Screen Please select “Ladder Debug” of Ladder Mode by Displaying setting dialog (F10) of the Ladder Monitor screen. a trigger counter can be specified. Stop Operations are to stop the execution of ladder when specified condition becomes true.1.c om Ladder debugging function Warning When executing or stopping a ladder program. (1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.) ce nt e r. (4) Stop Operation to execute from the first step and stop the execution at specified contact or coil instruction. special care is necessary. w w w . 5 X0000.4 X0000.Srch Dbgprm Sync. ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F1 F2 F3 F4 Exec B.7 X0012.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Seting ce nt e F1 Step [Displaying of Step] ” ACC=1 : result of operation : contents of stack : overflow : sign : zero ( 1 byte ) ( 0=NO. 1=YES ) nc ACC STK OF SF ZF STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=0 ZF=1 ” .6 Y0014.3.0 X0010. Communication Ladder Debug [LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006 Y0000.c SUB 1 END1 ACC : 1 F2 F3 F4 B. 1=YES ) ( 0=NO.3 X0000.7 Y0065.4 (a) Screen of Step Operation 65 .5 ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ om X0000.B (Stop) F5 B. I/O 4. File 2.B F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Seting 3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact or coil instruction.1.3. 1=YES ) ( 0=NO.3 R0900.0 X0000.Srch Dbgprm Sync.4. 1. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.2 X0000.3.c 2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.1 COMM ENT– G0500.2 SUB 2 END2 r. Diagnose 3.1 X0000. w w w F1 Step ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F2 F3 F4 B.Strt F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting Fig. 0 Y0065.7 om X0000.2 r.0 X0000.7 ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ X0012.5 X0000. 1. Communication Ladder Debug [LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006 Y0000. Diagnose 3.1 X0000.1.3.4 (b) Screen of Stop Function of Break with Condition 66 .5 SUB 1 END1 SUB 2 END2 TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.3 X0000. SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59 F1 Exec (Stop) F3 Dbgprm F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting [Display of setting scan] ” SCAN COUNT : 00000/00003 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ” Stop time COUNT:Scan checking count Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condition specified by signal becomes true.c nc Stop time COUNT:Trigger checking count (default 1) POINT:Trigger checking point (default 1) 0 – the top of the 1st level (Default 0) 1 – after END1 execution 2 – after END2 execution 3 – after END3 execution ADR: Trigger setting address ON:Rising edge detection OFF:Falling edge detection 2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan.2 X0000.4.3 R0900.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 F3 Dbgprm * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Seting ce nt e F1 Exec (Stop) Y0014.1 COMM ENT– G0500.6 [Display of setting trigger] ” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000. I/O 4.c X0010.3.3. File 2.4 X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ” w w w . .c Mode F Element f Net f Block X1000. .3. . 3) Stop function of break with condition . 8) 1) Ladder Debug Mode Ladder Debug Mode F Step f Break Control Step : Step operations (Default) Break Control : Stop function of break with condition 67 .0 Check–Point ce nt e F Level1 f END1 Count f END2 f END3 65535 Trigger–Mode w w w . [Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG] Ladder Debug Mode F Step f Break Control Step om Ladder Debug Parameter Break Control Mode F Trigger Address V Sub–program f Scan r. 1). 2). OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (b) Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG is displayed by pressing F3“Dbgprm”. Step operations . 7). 6). 1). 5). . 4).c nc F ON OK Cancel f OFF Init Please set the following items by “Ladder Debug Parameter” dialog. ) : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan. w w w . (Default) Net : Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position. * When “b) Step/Mode” is “Element” or “Net”. 4) Break Control/Mode ÔÔ Break Control Mode F Trigger Trigger Scan 68 f Scan ÔÔ : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condition specified by signal becomes true.) . 3) Step/Sub–Program ce nt e r. a trigger counter can be specified to stop after the trigger becomes true specified times.c Element Ô Ô Step V Sub–Program ÔÔ ÔÔ (No–Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program nc is not displayed. (Optionally. (Optionally. it is possible to set this item.3. a scan counter can be specified to stop after executing specified times of scans. Block : Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact or coil instruction. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Step/Mode Step Mode om F Element f Net f Block : Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.c X (Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program is displayed. 69 . it is possible to set this item. it is possible to set this item.c om Address : Trigger setting address * When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”.c Break Control Count 65535 Default=1 Count : Trigger Count or Scan Count(1 to 65535) 8) Break Control/Trigger Mode ÔÔ Break Control Trigger–Mode F ON f OFF ÔÔ ON : Rising edge detection OFF : Falling edge detection * When “Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”. 7) Break Control/Count ÔÔ ÔÔ w w w . 6) Break Control/Check point nc LEVEL1 : the top of the 1st level END1 : after END1 execution END2 : after END2 execution END3 : after END3 execution * When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”.3. it is possible to set this item. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 5) Break Control/Address ÔÔ ÔÔ Break Control Address X1000.0 ÔÔ ÔÔ ÔÔ Break Control Check–Point f END2 f END3 ÔÔ ce nt e F Level1 f END1 r. ce nt e ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F1 Step F2 F3 F4 B.(Block operation) 70 . (c) Execution of step operation 1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.c Ladder Debug Mode Step–Mode Sub–Program : Step : Net : No Check or Check * Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid. ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F1 Step F2 F3 F4 B. Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog : Step : Element : No Check or Check r.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Seting Step Operation to execute one instruction nc 2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position. the execution of step operation is started. When F1“Step” is pressed. Please select [OK] when setting is completed. Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel setting. 3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact or coil instruction.B F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position. the execution of step operation is started.c * Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid. Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog w w w . When F1“Step” is pressed.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Ladder Debug Mode Step–Mode Sub–Program om When [Init] is selected. Parameter of Ladder Debugging Function is initialized.Srch Dbgprm Sync. the cursor position becomes a position where the block operation begins.Srch Dbgprm Sync.c F1 F2 F3 F4 Exec B. the top of LEVEL1 becomes a beginning position. The block operation begins from the instruction which is stopping now when the block operation begins without specifying the beginning position.Strt F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting Search of the instruction at which the execution is stopped 5) Transfer the current status of input signals to the synchronous buffer 71 .B B.Strt F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting ce nt e F1 F2 F3 F4 Exec B. (If the step operation or the block operation is never done after the Ladder Debug Screen is displayed.B (Stop) F5 B. While executing block operation.Srch Dbgprm Sync. the execution of block operation is started from the beginning position to the cursor position. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog Ladder Debug Mode Step–Mode : Step : Block r.Strt F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting Executing (/Stopping) block operation w w w 4) Search of the instruction at which the execution is currently stopped Please press F2“B. When F1“Exec” is pressed.B (Stop) Cursor position becomes a beginning position of block operation.) ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F5 B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.Strt” is pressed after the cursor is moved. block operation is stopped by pressing F1“Stop” nc ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 .c om * Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid. If F5“B.Srch”.3. The instruction at which the execution is currently stopped is displayed in BLUE. ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F1 Exec (Stop) F2 F3 F4 F5 B. B F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting r. om Notes Normally. When F1“Exec” is pressed. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 F4“Sync. transferring to the synchronous buffer is automatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd level ladder. ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F2 F3 F4 B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 F1 Exec (Stop) F3 Dbgprm F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting Starting (/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (trigger) 2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan. While executing stop operation (trigger).Srch Dbgprm Sync.c F1 Step Press F4“Sync.B F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting w w w .B” is used to transfer the current status of input signals to the synchronous buffer so that succeeding instructions could operate on refreshed inputs when the execution is continued from current position. the execution of stop operation (trigger) is started. stop operation (trigger) is stopped by pressing F1“Stop” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.B” ce nt e SYNCHRONOUS BUFFER TRANSFER COMPLETED ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0 F1 Step F2 F3 F4 B.3. 72 . Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog Ladder Debug Mode Break–Mode Address Check–Point Count Trigger–Mode : : : : : : Break Control Trigger Trigger address Level1 or END1 to 3 1 to 65535 ON or OFF * Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.c nc (d) Execution of stop function of break with condition 1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condition specified by signal becomes true. and you can also change the signal status on this window. 73 . Diagnose Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information (2) Window view When [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected.c nc (1) Menu position To activate “Signal Status” window. pull down [2. the execution of stop operation (scan) is started. the window shown below appears. 2. Diagnose] menu.3. stop operation (scan) is stopped by pressing F1”Stop” SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59 F3 Dbgprm F7 Splist F8 F9 F10 Search Symbol Seting r. and select [signal Status] on the menu. You can examine the signal status of any PMC address. While executing stop operation (scan).3. w w w .4.2 Signal Status Window ce nt e Starting(/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (scan) “Signal Status” window displays the status of signals on PMC in real time. When F1“Exec” is pressed.c F1 Exec (Stop) 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog Ladder Debug Mode Break–Mode Count : Break Control : Scan : 1 to 65535 om * Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid. 2 (c) 74 F10 Wrt On .3.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (a) Window view without symbols : Signal Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 : : : : : : : : : : 01 80 00 1C 00 00 AA 55 00 00 –ON– 1 : 01 om 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 r.3.2 (a) ce nt e (b) Window view with symbols : Cursor Ô Ô Ô Signal Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 –OFF– 0 R00001 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80 .3.3.c R00000 R00001 R00002 R00003 R00004 R00005 R00006 R00007 R00008 R00009 Fig.4.3.2 (b) w w w Bit Symbols F8 Search F4 Symbol or or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff Fig.3.4.3.c nc WORK1 R00000 R00002 TOOL1 R00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 : 1C R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : PMC Address Byte symbol Hexadecimal expression Ô Ô 00 Fig. Tab om Page Up Move cursor. the MMC to M addresses. Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system. Enter key is effective only when the F4 ‘address’+[Search] F8 Display/Hide symbols. (4) Message Message Sure to modify ? 75 Meaning and countermeasure You tried to change signal status although write-protected. ce nt e [Symbol]/[Adress] r.c nc Warning Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes should always be made with extreme care.3. + Skip to next/previous kind of address. answer [No] to cancel change. Enter Enter key turns the signal status ON which was OFF. Otherwise. I/O Link and other external I/O devices write repeatedly. Note Attempts to change some signal statuses may fail. [Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10 Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. the CNC. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. . Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). and turns OFF which was ON. MMC. the signal status cannot be changed. and on the process to which it applies. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (3) Operations Operations on the signal status window is described.c write-protection is unlocked. and becomes red when unlock. w w w . It is recommended that these functions not be used with people near the equipment. Basic operation Function Cursor keys / Page Down Tab / Shift Move address area on window. If the attempt is intended. and external I/O devices to X addresses. Alternate signal status. answer [Yes]. (The CNC repeatedly writes to F addresses. At an address to which sequence programs. if they are improperly used. 3. Diagnose key with the r.3 “PMC Parameter” sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows below. For the detail. Diagnose] menu. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. the machine may act unpredictably. You can examine the contents of PMC “Timer” address. display the [2. it might be protected. please refer PMC programing manual. Note If you can not write PMC parameter. and you can also change the values for TMR instruction.c nc Warning When changing a signal status or PMC parameter.c cursor positioned to [PMC Parameter]. extreme care is necessary. (1) Timer window “Timer” window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. 1) Timer window 2) Counter window 3) Keep relay window 4) Data table control window 5) Data table window PMC Parameter om To display the “Parameter” submenu. then select [PMC Parameter] from the menu.4. pull down [2. 76 . Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Timer] which activates “Timer” window. Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the machine.3. or ce nt e Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table w w w . If the function for modifying the signal status or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly. The submenu can be displayed by pressing the 2. (a) Menu position To active “Timer” window. Diagnose] pull-down menu. and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. nc ce nt e 1.c (b) Window view 1) Window view without symbols: Timer T00000 T00002 T00004 T00006 T00008 T00010 T00012 T00014 T00016 T00018 600000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1000 0 11. 6. 10.3. 2. T00004 0 4. 8. 13. 4. T00010 0 2. 19. T00002 0 7. 5. 20. T00012 0 3. 18. T00014 0 ONE_SECOND 9. T00008 0 10. T00018 Byte symbol PMC Address Fig.c 2) Window view with symbols: Cursor Timer TEN_MINUTES 1. 14. T00006 0 8. 7.3. T00016 1000 5.3 (a) w w w . 12. 17. 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2.3. 9.3 (b) 77 0 .4.3.4. T00020 T00022 T00024 T00026 T00028 T00030 T00032 T00034 T00036 T00038 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fig. Diagnose Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information om Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table r. 15.3. T00000 600000 6. 16. K or D address is specified to search. Otherwise. When C.c (c) Operations The following table lists the operations supported by the [TIMER] window. and you can also change the values for CTR instruction. answer [No] to cancel change. You can enter new value only when the write–protection is unlocked. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. F4 F8 ‘number’ + [Search] F8 [Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10 Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).c ‘address’ + [Search] w Change timer value. 1–8 0–523. answer [Yes]. at the “Timer” window. ‘number’ + nc [Symbol]/[Address] w w .145. “Timer” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. C. If the attempt is intended. and becomes red when unlocked. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3) Function keys: F4 Symbol F8 Search F10 Wrt On or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff om or Fig. 78 . Move address area on window. Enter new timer value in milli–seconds.3 (c) Basic operation Cursor keys / Function Move cursor.3. Page Down ce nt e Page Up r.680 ms for timer No. The valid timer values are : 0–3. You can examine the contents of PMC Counter address. K.3. (2) Counter window “Counter” window displays the contents of PMC Counter address. 9–150 Enter Display/Hide symbols.3. T. (d) Message Message Sure to modify? Meaning and countermeasure You tried to change timer value although write–protected.280 ms for timer No. and D. You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address.4. Search timer address by timer number. Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. 10. 17. 9. Diagnose] menu. 15. 2. 6. Diagnose om Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information r. Then sub–menu appears which contains item [Counter] which activates “Counter” window. 1) Window view without symbols : Counter Address C00000 C00004 C00008 C00012 C00016 C00020 C00024 C00028 C00032 C00036 w . Address C00040 C00044 C00048 C00052 C00056 C00060 C00064 C00068 C00070 C00076 w w Fig.3 (d) 79 Preset/Current 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 . 1. 20.4. pull down [2. 18. 12.3. and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. the following window uppears.c Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table ce nt e (b) Window view When [COUNTER] is selected. 4. 3. 19.3.c nc No. 7. 2. 14. 16. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (a) Menu position To activate “Counter” window. 5. 11. 8.3. 13. Preset/Current 1000 / 347 256 / 129 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 36 / 0 0/ 0 0/ 0 No. 3.c nc F4 Symbol F8 Search F10 Wrt On or or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff Fig. Page Down Change timer value. C00024 0/ 0 3. C00028 36 / 0 4. Address Preset/Current WORK COUNTER 1.c 2. F4 . C00016 0/ 0 10. C00036 0/ 0 r.3.999 for BCD counter Enter [Symbol]/[Address] 80 Display/Hide symbols. The valid counter values are : 0–65.3 (e) 3) Function keys : w w w . Basic operation Cursor keys Page Up / ‘number’ + Function Move cursor.4.3. C00032 0/ 0 5. Move address area on window. C00020 256 / 129 7. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Window view with symbols: Cursor Counter No. Address Preset/Current 0/ 0 om 6. C00004 Current counter value Symbol ce nt e Preset counter value Counter number and Address Fig. You can enter new value only when the write–protection is unlocked.3. C00008 0/ 0 8.3.4.3 (f) (c) Operations The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER] window. C00012 0/ 0 9. C00000 1000 / 347 No.535 for binary counter 0–9. Otherwise. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. at the “Counter” window.c Sure to modify ? Meaning and countermeasure ce nt e (3) Keep relay window “Keep relay” window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address. and you can also change the status of Keep relays. and becomes red when unlocked. If the attempt is intended. Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Basic operation F8 ‘number’ + [Search] F8 [Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10 Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). Then sub–menu appears which contains item [Keep relay] which activates “Keep relay” window. Search counter address by timer number.c nc 2. and D. and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. answer [No] to cancel change.3. C. You can examine the signal status of PMC Keep relay address. om ‘address’ + [Search] Function (d) Message Message You tried to change counter value although write-protected. K. T. You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address. r. pull down [2. K or D address is specified to search. Diagnose] menu. When T. Diagnose 81 Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table . answer [Yes]. (a) Menu position To activate “Keep relay” window. “Counter” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information w w w . 3.3.3 (h) (c) Operations Basic operation Cursor keys Page Up / Function Move cursor.4.3.c 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce nt e K00000 K00001 K00002 K00003 K00004 K00005 K00006 K00007 K00008 K00009 Fig.3 (g) F8 Search F10 Wrt On or F10 WrtOff Fig.c nc 1) Function Keys : Enter key turns the signal status ON which was OFF. Page Down Move address area on window. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (b) Window view When “Keep relay” is selected following window is displayed.4. and turns OFF which was ON. Enter key is effective only when the write– protection is unlocked. 82 . Address Cursor Keep relay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00010 K00011 K00012 K00013 K00014 K00015 K00016 K00017 K00018 K00019 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 om 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r. Alternate signal status.3.3. Enter w w w . pull down [2. For the detail. (4) Data table control window “Data table control” window displays the informations of Data groups for PMC Data table address. C. answer [No] to cancel change. w w w . #4 MEMINP 0 : Can not change signal status. When T. answer [Yes]. r. om ‘address’ + [Search] (d) Message Message Meaning and countermeasure You tried to change signal status although write-protected. Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Data table control] which activates “Data table control” window. Otherwise. and D. #1 PRGRAM 0 : Can not activate On-line Editing and the functions in I/O menu. “Keep relay” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.c nc #7 DTBLDSP K19 or K902 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 * * * * * * * FROM-WRT #0 FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying dialog box of program back-up when exiting On-line editing.c Sure to modify ? ce nt e (e) Data for PMC control software Keep relay data can not use in sequence program because some keep relay data are used by PMC control software. Diagnose] menu. In this manual. #0 LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.3. You can examine the Data group attributes. at the “Keep relay” window. and you can also change the attributes on this window. K. T. (a) Menu position To activate “Data table control” window. If the attempt is intended. the addresses related to the operation of the On-line function are described.) K17 or K900 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DTBLDSP * * MEMINP * * #1 #0 PRGRAM LADMASK 1 : Can not display data table control data in PMC parameter. (The addresses marked ‘*’ do not effect the operation of the On-line function but used by PMC control software. You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address. please refer PMC programming manual. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Basic operation Function F8 [Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10 Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). C or D address is specified to search. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. 83 . and becomes red when unlocked. and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. 4.3 (i) 2) Function keys: F1 New F2 Delete F3 G. Start address DATA–TAABLE–TOP D00050 TOOL–TABLE D00200 BCD–CONV–TABLE Type Format 8000 10 20 100 10 byte word word byte word Hex Dec Dec Dec BCD nc 1. 3. Number w w w .c (b) Window view 1) Window view with symbols : Cursor ce nt e Data table control No. Data F4 Symbol F8 Search or or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff Fig. 2.3. 4.c Start address/ Data size symbol of the group Data group number Number of element Data format Protection on off off off off Write-protection Fig.3.4. Diagnose Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information om Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table r.3 (j) 84 F10 Wrt On . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2.3.3.3. 5. Basic operation Cursor keys Move cursor.3.c ‘address’+[Search] w Function ‘number’+[Search] [Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10 F8 Display/Hide symbols. Enter om Page Up Function Change “Number” with the cursor on the item. answer [Yes]. Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address. Otherwise. “Data table control” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. F1 [Delete] Delete data group on the cursor. r. answer [No] to cancel change.Data] [Symbol]/[Adress] F4 F8 w w . Enter Change “Type”. The data group which the cursor was on is displayed. (d) Messages Message Sure to modify ? 85 Meaning and countermeasure You tried to change signal status although write-protected. K and D. C. When the cursor is on “Type” or “Format”. small dialog box is displayed to choose the item. . You can enter new address only when the write-protection is unlocked. You can enter new number only when the write-protection is unlocked. at the “Data table control” window. F3 nc [G. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (c) Operations The table below lists the operations supported by the Data table control window. K or D address is specified to search. and becomes red when unlocked. F2 Switch to “Data table” window. Search address (’address’ can be symbol). C. You can omit the leading character ‘D’ of the address. Page Down / Change “Start address” with the cursor on the item. Search data group by data group number. Basic operation [New] Make new data group. ‘D-address’+ ‘number’+ Move address area on window. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. When T. If the attempt is intended. [New] duplicates the data group on the cursor. T. You can change them only when the write-protection is unlocked. A hundred data groups can be created at most. Table of the data table control display (1). You cannot delete all the data groups because one data group must exist at least.c Enter ce nt e Table of the data table control display (2). “Format” and “Protection” with the cursor on the item. the following window appears. 8000 bytes. 8000 bytes. and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. and you can also change the values of Data table on this window. hexadecimal. Diagnose ce nt e r. Then sub-menu appears which contains item [Data table] which activates “Data table” window.c D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 D00004 D00005 D00006 D00007 D00008 D00009 D00010 D00011 D00012 D00013 D00014 D00015 D00016 D00017 D00018 D00019 C0 FE 80 FD 00 FB 00 F6 00 EC D00020 D00021 D00022 D00023 D00024 D00025 D00026 D00027 D00028 D00029 00 D8 00 B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Fig. 1) Window view without symbols : nc Data table Group 1 : D00000 . pull down [2.4.D07999.3. protected F6 FF EC FF D8 FF B0 FF 60 FF w w w . You can examine the contents of Data table. hexadecimal. 2. Diagnose] menu.c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table (b) Window view When [Data table] is selected. (a) Menu position To activate “Data table” window. protected Area of Data group Data group number Data format Number of element and data size 86 Write-protection .3.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om (5) Data table window “Data table” window displays the contents of PMC Data table address according to Data groups defined by Data table control data.3 (k) Data group information: Group 1 : D0000–D07999. 3.3 (m) (c) Operations The following table lists the operations supported by the [DATA TABLE] window.3. 87 .3. + Tab Skip to next/previous data group. You can enter new value only when the write-protection is unlocked. hexadecimal.3. Change data value.4. The valid data values are : For details of the values that can be input. 8000 bytes. Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window Basic operation Function Cursor keys Move cursor. Data Symbol F8 Search F10 Wrt On or or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff Fig. protected D00001 FF D00006 D00002 EC D00007 D00003 FF D00008 D00004 D8 D00009 Cursor D00010 C0 B0 D00011 FE FF D00012 80 60 D00013 FD FF D00014 00 ce nt e Symbol Address FF om D00005 r.3.3 (l) 3) Function keys: w w w . see the table of input data values below.c DAT–TABLE–TOP D00000 F6 Fig.4.D07999.c nc F3 F4 C. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Window view with symbols : Data group information Data table Group 1:D00000 . Page Up / Page Down Tab / Shift ‘number’+ Enter Move address area on window. F4 ‘address’+[Search] F8 ‘number’+[Search] om Switch to ”Data table control” window.647 0 to 99 0 to 9. Data table byte Decimal word -128 to 127 -32. at the “Data table” window.648 to 2.483. answer [No] to cancel change. Otherwise. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Basic operation Function Changes the keep relay signal status.147. C. C or K address is specified to search. r. The Enter key is enabled only in the write enabled state. T.999 0 to 99.999 00 to FF 0000 to FFFF 00000000 to FFFFFFFF nc Hexadecimal double-word (dword) (d) Messages Message w w w . Pressing Enter the Enter key toggles the signal status between off and on. When T. “Data table” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.c [C. The displayed data group is displayed at top of the window.767 BCD -2. You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address.147.768 to 32. ce nt e F8 Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). answer [Yes]. .3. K and D. If the attempt is intended. [Symbol]/[Adress] Display/Hide symbols. F3 Search data group by data group number. and becomes red when unlocked.Data] [Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10 Unlock write-protection/Re-protect.c Sure to modify ? 88 Meaning and countermeasure You tried to change data table value although write-protected.999.483. For details of messages.4 The “PMC ALARM MESSAGE” dialog box displays a PMC alarm message. PMC Alarm Status (1) Menu position To activate “PMC alarm message” dialog box.3.3. key to close “PMC alarm message” dialog box. (4) Messages The alarm messages same as PMC’s are displayed in this window. Diagnose ce nt e r. Space or . pull down [2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3. the following dialog box appears.4.4 (a) (3) Operation Press Enter . refer to the following manual: “FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/ RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/ NB/NB2 Ladder Language Programming Manual” (B–61863E) 89 .4.3.c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information (2) Window view When [PMC alarm status] is selected. PMC alarm message . om 2. See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages. and select [PMC alarm status] on the menu.c nc ALARM NOTHING w w w OK Fig. Diagnose] menu. 5 “PMC Status” window displays the status of program on PMC.5 (a) 90 . Diagnose r. following window is displayed Status Series/Edition ****/** ****/** SCAN TIME CUR MAX MIN Date/Time 00/00/00 00:00:00 w w . and select [PMC Status] on the menu. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.c om Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information ce nt e (2) Window view When “PMC Status” is selected.c nc PMC TYPE PMC-*** 0ms 0ms 0ms Series/Edition of PMC Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card Connected PMC type Current scan time Maximum scan time Minimum scan time Month/Date/Year Hour:Minute:Second w Fig.3. 2.4.3. Diagnose] menu.3. PMC Status Window (1) Menu position To activate “PMC Status” window. pull down [2.4.3. the following dialog box appears. [NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the program.c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information nc (2) Displaying the dialog box When [RUN/STOP the program] is selected.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Executing or Stopping a Program The program execution status can be changed from “RUNNING” to “STOP” or from “STOP” to “RUNNING”.c STOP the program Yes No Fig.6 ce nt e r.6 (a) [YES] : Stop the program. (a) Program running state While a program is being executed. 2. Diagnose] pull–down menu.4.3. 91 . then select [RUN/STOP the program] from the menu. Diagnose om 3. (1) Position of menu To display the [RUN/STOP the program] dialog box. the following dialog box appears.3. display the [2. the dialog box shown below appears.3. (b) Program stop state While a program is in the stop state.3. w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 RUN the program ? No om Yes Fig. w 2. special care is necessary. the machine may act unpredictably.3. the function records a state when the signal changes.3. [NO] : Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder program.4. w . Diagnose w Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information 92 .6 (b) r.4.7 (1) Outline of Signal Trace Function This function checks the signal history which cannot be checked in the status display. In two–byte addressing.Diagnose”.c (2) Operations (a) Selection of Signal Trace Screen Please select “Signal Trace” from the menu of “2. Using one–byte or two byte addressing.c [YES] : Executes the ladder program. Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the machine.3. 3. If a program is applied incorrectly. discontinuous address can be set.3. nc Signal Trace Function ce nt e Warning When executing or stopping a program. 3. f @@@OFF . Signal Trace End Time –:–:– r.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Signal Trace 0000 0001 ³0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 7 6 F f f f f f f f X0000(01111111) 4 3 2 5 F f F f f f f f F F F f f f f f F f f f f f f f F F f f f f f f Signal Trace Start Time –:–:– ÔÔ F1 EXEC STOP 1 F F f f f f f f 0 f f f f f f f f Value F F F f f f f f FDH 2DH 60H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H om No. [Signal Trace Parameter DIALOG] nc Signal Trace Parameter w w w . F @@@ ON The display of trace data can be scrolled by .7 Screen of signal trace function (b) Setting of signal trace parameter “Signal Trace Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing the F3“Param” key. and Page Down key ce nt e Fig.3. Page Up . .3.c MODE f 1 BYTE f 2 BYTES (Consecutive Address) F 2 BYTES (Two Address not Consecutive) ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 2 F PMC ADDRESS f PHY ADDRESS f PMC ADDRESS F PHY ADDRESS X0000 FFE480 7654 3210 MASK 7654 3210 1111 1111 V MAX DISPLAY MASK OK 1111 1111 Cancel Please set the following items by “Signal Trace Parameter” dialog.c F3 PARAM ³ @@@The latest data. 93 . .2 . . . a knowledge of programming PMC by C language is needed. Mask data Sets a masked bit or bits (signals can be read with unnecessary bits masked) ce nt e Notes When the trace address type is specified as a physical address. . . . Refer to “PROGRAMMING MANUAL(C LANGUAGE)/ B–61863E–1” and operate carefully not to specify an illegal memory address. a system error may occur. trace address and mask data r. . . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1) MODE . Please select [Cancel] or press Esc key when you cancel setting. The screen display size can be changed.4. if an illegal memory address is specified to execute the trace. (c) Starting or stopping signal trace function Please press F1“EXEC” or “STOP” in Fig. . w w w .3.c nc 3) MAX DISPLAY . (No check) – Half screen display (8 lines) X (Check) – All screen display (20 lines) Please select [OK] when setting is completed. Sets address type. . . 94 . 3.7 Screen Of Signal Trace Function. .3. the trace automatically starts at power on. About the legal range of a physical address which can be specified.c om Address type – PMC address (symbol is also acceptable) – Physical address Trace address Sets address at which a signal is traced by specifiedaddress type. (d) Automatic tracing function at power on When the trace parameters have been specified and bit 5 of keep relay K17 or K900 has been set to 1. Sets a mode used for reading signals 2) ADDRESS 1. 3.c R0901. Displaying the results of tracing signals on a time axis enables checking the relationship between the signals.2 R0901.Srch Sgnprm Stop Time 1996/01/30 10:11:22 F6 Exchg F10 SgnSet Fig.3 512 Start Time ÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ F1 Exec STOP 1024(msec) 1996/01/30 10:11:12 F2 F3 T.4.4.8 Screen of Signal Analysis Function (b) Setting of Analysis Parameter Analysis Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing F3“Sgnprm”.c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information Signal analysis Condition : Trigger–ON Trigger Mode : ABOUT nc Sampling Time : 10 (sec) Trigger Address : *ESP R0901.3. D Maximum number of signals traced at the same time : 16 D Maximum sampling period : 10 sec D Sampling interval : 8 msec om (2) Operations (a) Selection of Signal Analysis Screen 2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. 95 .3.0 w w w .1 R0901.3. Diagnose ce nt e r.8 Signal Analysis Function (1) Outline of Signal Analysis Function The changes in a PMC ladder signal can be traced on the specified trigger conditions. Specify the maximum trace time in a range of 1 to 10 sec. .c X0000.4 10: X0000.6 15: R0900. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [Analysis Parameter DIALOG] Analysis Parameter Condition f Start F Trigger–ON f Trigger–OFF (sec) Trigger Address Trigger–Mode f AFTER F ABOUT f BEFORE f ONLY Signal–Address 2: X0000.3 Cancel Init nc OK *ESP om 10 Sampling Time (Next Page) w w w .1 3: X0000. A symbol name can be used.c Signal–Address 9: X0000.0 r.3 8: R0900.2 ce nt e 1: 4: X0000.3. 96 . 2) Trigger Address . . .4 13: R0900. 1) Sampling Time .7 16: R0900.5 11: X0000.6 12: X0000.1 7: R0900.2 5: R0900.7 Please set the following items by “Analysis Parameter” dialog. Specify a trigger address from which the tracing starts on the PMC address.5 14: R0900.0 6: R0900. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3) Condition . . 0 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed.c 4) Trigger Mode . . 1 : ABOUT In this mode. . 97 . . w w w . signal status are obtained in the period specified in the SAMPLING TIME before the trigger conditions are satisfied. om Notes 1 Condition 1 and 2 are effective when a trigger address is specified. Sampled data for up to 10 seconds is stored in the trace buffer. 2 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed and the trigger address signal falls. Specify the conditions at which the tracing starts. 2 : BEFORE In this mode. . . Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel setting. Trigger mode 2 is effective when condition 2 is set. . . 5) Signal Address . . 1 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed and the trigger address signal rises. (c) Setting of Signal Analysis Screen Analysis setting dialog is displayed by pressing F10“SgnSet”. r. Notes 2 Trigger mode 1 is effective when condition 1 is set. the signal states are obtained only when the trigger conditions are satisfied. signal status are obtained in the period specified in the SAMPLING TIME with the time at the middle when the trigger conditions are satisfied. When [Init] is selected. parameter and trace data of Signal Analysis Function is initialized. A signal is stored in the buffer within 8 ms.3.c nc ce nt e 0 : AFTER In this mode. Specify up to 16 addresses at which the tracing is performed with PMC addresses or symbol names. Please select [OK] when setting is completed. 3 : ONLY In this mode. signal status are obtained in the period specified in the SAMPLING TIME from the time when the trigger conditions are satisfied. c nc Please set the following items by “Analysis setting” DIALOG. 98 . . . . . (No check) –– Scrolls in each graduation X (Check) –– Scrolls in each page Please select [OK] when setting is completed. the time division can be changed. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [Analysis setting DIALOG ] Analysis setting Scale f 8 msec F 16 msec f 32 msec om Address/Symbol F Symbol f Address r. Max Display : w w w . . . The unit of a right and left scroll can be changed. . . . . . The screen display size can be changed. the symbols and addresses are displayed. 1) Scale . Changing the time division.3. Displaying symbols for trigger and trace addresses When symbols are defined for trigger and trace addresses. 3) Display Mode . When displaying the signal waveform. . . . (No check) – Half screen display (four points) X (Check) – All screen display(eight points) 4) Scroll Mode .c Display–Mode V Max Display Scroll–Mode V Scale(msec/Times) Cancel ce nt e OK 8 –––– 8 msec/divisions 16 –––– 16msec/ ” 32 –––– 32msec/ ” 2) Address/Symbol . When the parameters for sampling have been specified and bit 6 of keep relay K17 or K900 have been set to 1. Pressing F2“T.c to an address to be displayed at the position of the specified address and press TO key.10. then pressing F2“T. (e) Displaying traced data by specifying period Enter a period in ms in which traced data is to be displayed. (f) Exchanging positions at which traced data is displayed. the data sampling automatically starts at power on.Screen of Signal Analysis Function.3. 99 . Pressing the F6“Exchg” key moves the cursor to the first traced address. Only EXEC key is effective.c nc F6 Exchg F6 F7 Select Cancel F6 To F7 Cancel F6 Exec F7 Cancel (g) Reading signals automatically at power on Since parameter and sampling data is stored in nonvolatile memory. After TO key is pressed in the above procedure. (d) Starting or stopping of data sampling Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig. Move the cursor ce nt e r. Pressing CANCEL key restores the exchange trace data to original positions.1. Pressing EXEC key exchanges the positions of the traced data items. (Example) Entering 800.SRCH” key displays the trace data. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 with or om Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel setting. [Changing of Function key] w w w . data is retained when the power is turned off. Move the cursor to an address to be displayed at different position key and press SELECT key.SRCH” key displays the waveform from 512 ms to 1024 ms. 3. it is necessary to display the abovementioned parameter and stop the on–line monitor driver.4. the following functions cannot be used.0 Copyright(C) 1996. In this state. [I/O]. version. [PMCLAD]. and [I/O] functions on DPL/MDI. w w w .3. Diagnose ce nt e r. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. key to close “System Information” dialog box.3. Press Enter .c Ladder Monitor Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm status PMC Status RUN/STOP the program Signal Trace Signal Analysis System Information (2) Displaying dialog box When [System Information] is selected. and [SYSPRM] functions on CRT/MDI. other input/output functions cannot use the line. pull down [2. Display System Information (1) Menu position To display “System Information” dialog box. If other input/output functions use the line. [SYSTEM PARAM]. and select [System Information] on the menu om 2. and etc can be referred. [EDIT].9 The system software information such as specifications. the following dialog box appears. Diagnose] menu. Space or . 2 While the on–line monitor driver is operating. 100 .3. [EDIT].c nc System Information Ladder Editing Package A08B–9201–J510 Version 01. FANUC LTD Fig.9 (a) Notes 1 The on–line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating.4. 4 The [3. for example. the communication speed decreases. then select [Load PROGRAM] from the menu. the screen display of NC (Position. 2 When screen made by C language executor is displayed. It is recommended to use input/output functions after moving to other screens (Position. For the [Backup program] dialog box 3.c (1) Menu position To display the “Load program” dialog box. I/O Load program Store program Backup program om 1. It is recommended to using input/output functions while NC is not operating. display the [3.) might slow when using input/output functions (Load from PMC. There is no problem in the operation of NC.1 A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer. using the program with the on–line function. For the [Load program] dialog box 2.c Notes 1 In case of operating NC.3. etc. 101 .4.4. “LOAD OF PROGRAM” is used to transfer a ladder program from the PMC to the personal computer when.). . I/O Load program Store program Backup program (2) Displaying the dialog box Selecting [Load of program] causes the following dialog box to appear. For the [Store program] dialog box 3. Store to PMC. I/O] menu provides the following options: Input/Output 3. etc. etc. nc Loading of Program ce nt e r. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. I/O] pull–down menu. w w w 3.).4. display the [3.1 (a) ce nt e (3) Operation Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key. for example.c Close dialog box Fig. Use “Store program” to transfer a ladder program from the personal computer to the PMC to enable. I/O] pull–down menu.3. the dialog box closes automatically.2 nc Storing to the Program A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.3. I/O w w Load program Store program Backup program (2) Displaying the dialog box Selecting [Store program] causes the following dialog box to appear. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Load program Transfer data type F LADDER f ALL 100% Exec Abort Abort loading Execute loading Load program size indicator om 0% Cancel r. w 3. the use of the program with the on–line function. then select [Store program] from the menu.4. 102 .4. .c (1) Menu position To display the “Store program” dialog box. Once the program has been loaded normally.4. then press the Enter key.4. 3. 4. a program cannot be stored to the PMC.I/O]. 3.4. Always back up such a program before turning off the power to the CNC.c Execute storing Loading program size indicator om 0% Fig. the dialog box closes automatically. Caution A program being edited or which is currently stored will be lost if the power to the CNC is turned off before the program has been backed up. then select “Backup program” 103 . backup the program (see Section 3. S If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to the PMC but before the program is backed up. first display the pull–down menu for [3. the results of editing will be lost. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Store program Transfer data type F LADDER f ALL 100% Exec Abort Abort storing Cancel Close dialog box r.4. move to “Ladder Monitor”. then press the Enter key. When storing a program to the CNC.3 w w Program Backup A program stored in the PMC or which has been edited with the on–line function need to be backed up so that the program is not lost when the power to the CNC is turned off.4.3. To enable storing to the PMC.c nc Notes S While “Online Editor” is in progress.2 (a) ce nt e (3) Operation Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key.3). Once the program has been stored normally. therefore. (1) Menu position To display the program backup dialog box. w .4.4.3. Fig. and backup is started.3 (b) (3) Operation 1) Click the [Exec] button.c om (2) Displaying the dialog box When [Backup program] is selected. 104 .3.4.1.3 (a) Backup program Sure to backup the program into the Open–CNC system ? w w . Cancel Closes the dialog box. the message “Backup complete” appears.3. Cancel Closes the dialog box. (a) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC flash memory Backup program ce nt e Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to backup program to F-ROM.4. See Section 1. The message [Now backup] appears. I/O Load program Store program Backup program r.4. Provided backup is completed successfully. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. Fig.c (b) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC program memory on the personal computer w Exec Executes backup.2 for information about the backup destination for each CNC system configuration.3.2. a dialog box is displayed according to the backup destination. Exec nc Executes backup.4. Communication] pull–down menu.5 (a) 105 Start or stop communication Close communication dialog box . om Caution In the case of a CNC system in which programs are backed up to PMC flash memory.5 This function establishes or disconnects a communication link between open CNC and PMC. then select [Communication] from the menu.4.c nc (2) Displaying the dialog box (a) Displaying the “Communication” dialog box Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box to appear: Communication w w status w Start Cancel Fig.3. Communication Communication . place the CNC in the emergency stop state before starting backup. 4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing the Esc key. The on–line function can be used only while a communication link is established.c Communication ce nt e (1) Menu position To display the “Communication” dialog box. display the [4. The communication link is established automatically as soon as the computer is executed.4.3. r. 3. 4. 0000 0000 Cancel F7 F8 F9 F10 Splist Search Symbol Seting Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.c nc If a match with a program on the PMC is confirmed.1 (a) (2) Program loading w w w . and communication are automatically started. Communication Communication r.6. Load Load from PMC program memory. the subprogram screen appears.6. Disregard Quit Disregard difference. I/O om Monitoring a Ladder 4. .3. the on–line functions. Store Store to PMC program memory. Fig.6. 1.4.4. Diagnose 3.c Status Start ce nt e Try to connect with PMC . . Quit On–Line function. N : E–3160 selected program is not same.1 (1) Starting the on–line functions When the system is started. the dialog box shown below appears.3. File 2.4. If no match is found.6 Examples of Operation This section provides the following examples of using the on–line function: 3.3. From the dialog box.1 (b) 106 . select [Load] to load a program from the PMC. File 2. nc (4) Monitoring action of ladder diagram The “Ladder Monitor” window is displayed as following.1 (c) (b) By pressing the or key.4.3. Diagnose 3.6.c LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) S P00010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) Cancel ce nt e OK Fig. (d) The ladder diagram for the specified subprogram is displayed. Communication Ladder Monitor [LEVEL1] NET 00001-00006 Ô Ô Ô R0000.1 D000 R0000. the “Sub–program list” dialog box appears as shown below: Sub–program list om MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R1 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L1 PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L2 r. I/O 4.0 ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ D000 SUB 1 END F7 F8 F9 F10 SpList Search Symbol Seting Fig.3. position the cursor to the subprogram to be displayed.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (3) Selecting a subprogram (a) After a program is loaded from the PMC. (a) Displaying the “Ladder Monitor” window w w w .c 1.6. (c) Press the Enter key.1 (d) (b) Monitoring contact and coil status Contacts and coils are displayed to indicate their status: ON (1) 107 .4. OFF (0) Thick Thin Thin Thick Thick Thin om ON (1) Thick Thick (R) Thick Thin Thin r. press function key F8 [SEARCH]. Then. (e) Opening the “Display setting” dialog box Pressing function key F10 [SET] causes the “Display setting” dialog box to appear. its address. or functional instruction number (Sxxx).3.1 (e) (f) Displaying functional instruction parameters Position the cursor to “Function Parameter” and check “Display”.6.c (S) Thin (c) Moving in the ladder The area displayed on the window can be moved by cursor-up/down key and Page Up / Page Down . press the 108 Enter key to close the “Display . Then. nc Display setting Ladder Mode F Online Editor Symbol & Comment Display F Symbol f Address f Relay Comment f Symbol & Address f Relay Comment & Address f Relay Comment & Symbol OK Function Parameter j Display w w w . (d) Searching for a net To move to a desired position. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 or OFF (0).4.c f Ladder Monitor Cancel Fig. They are displayed with thick or thin line according to their status as follows. Function key F8 ce nt e [Search] is useful to jump directly to your destination. enter the number of the net to be displayed.3. Then. together with PMC addresses. The functional instruction parameters appear as shown below: -OFF - RST SUB 36 0002 ADDB TCTRL-1 ACT TCNT-1 [ 12] om 0000000001 NXT-TCNT [ TCNT-1 r.c Contents of address 13] Contents of address NXT-TCNT ce nt e Fig.6.2 SUB 36 13] Fig.3. as shown below: RST nc R9091.1 (g) (5) Checking the PMC status (a) Displaying the “Status” window Select [2.0 ACT R0112 [ 12] 0000000001 w R0114 [ w w 0002 ADDB . The “Status” window appears as shown below: 109 . coil. Position the cursor to “Address” in the “Symbol & Comment Display” field.4. and functional instruction parameters appear.6.3.4. Diagnose] from the menu bar.3. select “PMC status”.c R0103.1 (f) (g) Changing the symbol/comment display mode Open the “Display setting” dialog box again. The contact. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 setting” dialog box. Press the Enter key to close the “Display setting” dialog box. 2.4.1. ”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.1 (j) is visible.1 (i) (c) Checking whether a program is running While a ladder program is running. the icon indicated in Fig.1. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Status Series/Edition 4066/10 SCAN TIME CUR MAX MIN 0ms 0ms 0ms ce nt e r. check the details of the alarm state.1 (h) nc (b) Checking the alarm state When the PMC enters the alarm state. Should this occur. the color of the PMC alarm icon changes from gray to yellow.2. 3.6.3.c Date/Time 00/00/00 00:00:00 om PMC TYPE PMC-RB4 Fig. Then. Diagnose] and open the “PMC alarm message” dialog box.) 110 .6.4.6. (For details of icons.6.4.3. (For details of icons. see (2). 3.c ER32 NO I/O DEVICE w w Ok Fig. (k) is visible.3. When no ladder program is running. the icon shown in Fig.) PMC alarm message w .1. ”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3. see (2).4.4.4. select [2. Fig.4.1 (j) Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Program on PMC is running.6.4. select [2. (d) Displaying the communication status While communication with the PMC is being performed. see (2). 3.4.3.1 (k) ce nt e r. When communication with the PMC has not been established.c nc (6) Monitoring signals (a) Opening ”Signal Status” window Pull down the [2.1 (l) Communication is stopped. Fig.1 (m) is visible. 3. Signal Status G00000 G00001 G00002 G00003 G00004 G00005 G00006 G00007 G00008 G00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : : : : : : : : : : Fig.2.4.4.1 (m) When changing the status of the communication being performed with the PMC. 3.c om To change the ladder program execution status.1 (l) is visible.6.6. Diagnose] then use the “RUN/STOP the ladder” dialog box.3. the icon indicated in Fig. Program on PMC is stopped. select [Signal Status] from the menu. 3. 3.1. use the [4. the ”Signal Status” window is displayed.4.6. the icon shown in Fig. w w w .) Communication is active. 111 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .4. Diagnose] menu. (For details of icons.6. ”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.6.1 (n) and the functions of function keys change as following. 3.4. Communication] dialog box.6. Fig. 6.1 (p) (c) Displaying symbol w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 F4 Symbol F8 Search F10 Wrt On or or F4 Adress F10 WrtOff om Fig.3. the function key changes to [Adress] which hides the symbols.c Function key [Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on F4 the window. and the cursor moves onto signal of R00000.0.1 (q) 112 42 . When the symbols are displayed. just above the corresponding signal.0” and press function key [Search].3.c R00000 is displayed at top of the window. ce nt e Signal Status R00000 R00001 R00002 R00003 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : : : : 42 00 00 00 R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00 nc Fig.3.4.1 (o) (b) Searching Address Enter ”R0. the address F8 r.3.6. Symbols defined for byte address are also displayed just above their addresses on the window.6.4. F4 bit symbols byte symbol Signal Status –ON– –OFF– 1 0 : CONST R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00 R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00 Fig.4. It is recommended that these functions not be used with people near the equipment. Signal status changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system. then press ce nt e Page Down make the signal status change. and turns a signal status OFF which was ON.c om Warning Signal status changes should always be made with extreme care. 113 F10 . The color of cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function key returns to [Wrt On]. The color of cursor changes to red from yellow. because the Ladder diagram writes the signals frequently. and on the process to which it applies. (f) Enabling write-protection again Press function key F10 [WrtOff] to re-protect the contents of addresses on the window from unforeseen changes.3.c w w w –ON– –OFF– 1 0 : Fig.1 (r) Note Some signals may not change their status even if you change them. and the external I/O devices on X-address. MMC on M-address. or the external I/O devices such as I/O-Link: NC writes signals on F-address. (e) Changing status Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys. or the signals are frequently updated by NC. r. to the signal you want to change. MMC.3.4. if they are improperly used. And the function key F10 changes to [WrtOff].6. Signal Status 0 nc CONST R00000 1 0 0 0 0 42 R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 02 R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00 . Enter Page Up Enter and key to key turns a signal status ON which was OFF. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (d) Unlocking write-protection Press function key [Wrt On] to unlock write protection of F10 the contents of addresses displayed on the window. 3.. Then.c nc Fig.6. (a) Displaying the program backup dialog box Open [3. (The message displayed in the dialog box varies with the CNC system.. then select ”Backup program”. C. The dialog box shown below appears.) ce nt e Backup program Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to backup program to FROM. A message dialog box appears as shown below. r.I/O] on the pull down menu. The results of editing will be lost if the power to the CNC is turned off without performing backup. Select [OK] to end the on-line function. select [Ladder Monitor] from the menu.1 (s) (b) Performing backup Click the [Exec] button.6. Provided backup is completed successfully.3.1 (t) 114 Cancel .4.3.3. FILE] from the menu bar. (8) Ending the on-line function (a) Ending the on-line function Select [1.” appears. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (g) Hiding ”Signal Status” window Pull down the [2. then the ”Signal Status” window disappears. Are you sure you want to exit ? OK Fig.4. Note Non-volatile PMC address T. the message ”Backup complete” appears. (c) Closing the dialog box Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing the Esc key.3 for detail). and backup is started. Diagnose] menu. select [Exit]. The message ”Now backup. K and D which is called ”PMC parameter” has special window to display and modify them (see 3.4.c om (7) Backing up a program Back up the results of editing performed with the on–line function to prevent the results from being lost when the power to the CNC is turned off. Exec Cancel w w w . 2 nc The source file of a sequence program is edited.5.c (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below. General om Press the function key corresponding to the desired function.3. Editing .5.c F1 KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : F4 KEY : F5 KEY : F6 KEY : F7 KEY : F8 KEY : F9 KEY : F10 KEY : [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END Fig. OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ] EDIT PRINT COMPILE DECOMPILE I/O PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY ON–LINE FUNCTION END ce nt e r. OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] w [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ] w w F1 KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : F4 KEY : F5 KEY : F6 KEY : F7 KEY : F8 KEY : F9 KEY : F10 KEY : 1 EDIT 2 PRINT EDIT PRINT COMPILE DECOMPILE I/O PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY ON–LINE FUNCTION END 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 Fig.1 Off-line Menu Screen 3.2 (a) Off-line Menu 115 END .5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3.5.5 OFF-LINE FUNCTION 3.1 When Off–Line Function is selected from the on–line function menu. the following off–line menu screen appears. The corresponding screen will appear.3. c w w w 1 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. For example. 116 .3.2(c) Editing Title (2) Termination [Operation] 1) Select [END] or press the Esc key on the editing screen.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) The following editing menu screen appears: EDIT RB4 (STEP SEQ) 1 TITLE om TITLE LADDER DIAGRAM SYMBOL & COMMENT MESSAGE I/O MODULE SYSTEM PARAMETER END r.c F1 KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : F4 KEY : F5 KEY : F6 KEY : F10 KEY : [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 2 LADSEFC 3 SYMBOL4 MESSAG5 MODULE6 SYSPRM7 8 9 10 END Fig. 2) The following message appears: F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit 3) Press the desired function key.5.2(b) Editing Menu ce nt e 3) Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key. 4) The editing screen for the selected data appears.3. the screen below is displayed when [TITLE] is selected. EDIT (TITLE) 1) 2) 3) 4) RB4 (STEP SEQ) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : MACHINE TOOL NAME : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MB PMC & NC NAME : PMC PROGRAM NO : 5) EDITION NO 6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO 7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING : : : 8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY 9) ROM WRITTEN BY : : 10) REMARKS : nc .5. 3. r. 2) Enter data. (i) To continue editing. 3. (ii) When QUIT is selected.c nc 5) EDITION NO 6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO 7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING 1 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY 9) ROM WRITTEN BY : : 10) REMARKS : 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. 2) The following title editing screen appears: EDIT (TITLE) 1) 2) 3) 4) RB4 (STEP SEQ) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : MACHINE TOOL NAME : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MA PMC & NC NAME : PMC PROGRAM NO : : : : w w w .1 (2) Input [Operation] 1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the and keys. 4) When UPDATE or QUIT is selected.3. the editing operation is terminated after the results of editing are written to a file. The maximum number of characters usable for each title data item is listed below. the editing is continued. MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters MACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 characters CNC & NC NAME : 32 characters PMC PROGRAM NO : 4 characters EDITION NO : 2 characters 117 .5.c Title Data Editing ce nt e (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen. select the appropriate function key. the display returns to the editing menu screen. (iii) When EDIT is selected. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (i) When UPDATE is selected.2.5. The display returns to the main menu. the editing operation is terminated without writing the results of editing to a file. om (ii) To terminate editing.2.1 Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder. select [END]. 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 PROGRAM DRAWING NO DATE OF PROGRAMMING PROGRAM DESIGNED BY ROM WRITTEN BY REMARKS : : : : : 32 characters 16 characters 32 characters 32 characters 32 characters (3) Termination [Operation] Esc key to return to the editing menu screen. 2) The following message appears. F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit om 1) Select [END] on press the r.c 3) Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing menu. Ladder Diagram/Step Sequence Editing (1) A program configuration screen This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing of a target subprogram. ce nt e 3.5.2.2 EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4 (STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER PROGRAM: (STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) LEVEL1 j P1 j P8 j P21 j j j P101 j LEVEL2 j LEVEL3 P2 j P4 j P5 P9 j P14 j P15 P22 j P24 j P25 j j j j P202 j]P304 j]P405 j P6 j P16 j P26 j j j]P406 j P7 j P17 j P27 j j j]P407 .c nc j j j j j j j ] w w w S–prog’P1 1 ADRESS 2 3 4 (a) Screen display Screen display 5 6 DELETE 7 8 9 NEW 10 ZOOM (Pxxx represents a subprogram number) Meaning Display by [ZOOM] or j LEVEL1 the 1st ladder level ladder diagram j LEVEL2 the 2nd ladder level ladder diagram j LEVEL3 the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram j Pxxx a subprogram ladder diagram j] Pxxx a subprogram step sequence diagram ∆] Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in editing Pxxx a duplicate subprogram 118 Enter step sequence diagram ladder or step seqence diagram 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Notes 1 The 3rd ladder level can be omitted. 2 If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the subprogram configuration screen is displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key, the editing of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed is suspended. Such subprograms are marked with ∆]. r.c om Following keys are useful in this screen. Function key [ADRESS] : Switching address/symbol display [DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram [NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram [ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram Other keys : Displaying previous screen Page Down : Displaying next screen ce nt e Page Up Meaning of display EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER] nc EDIT : (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : [A:¥FLADDER¥ : Editing screen The list screen of subprogram Setting a model Current directory .c PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) PROGRAM: Remarks which is one of the title data w w w jLEVEL1 jLEVEL2 jLEVEL3 LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder j P0001 j]P0002 j P0004 j P0005 j P0006 j P0007 j : a subprogram of the ladder j] : a subprogram of the step sequence (b) Creating a new subprogram –Press the [NEW] key. New program name ? 119 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 –Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for example). Program Type ? F1 F2 Ladder Step sequence (c) Modifying a subprogram –Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for Enter key. Alternatively, om example), then press the [ZOOM] or position the cursor to P200 then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key. r.c –If a subprogram number marked with ∆] (P21, for example) is selected, the following message is displayed: Editing this subprogram is not completed. Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y] ce nt e To continue the editing session using the results obtained from suspended previous editing session, press the Enter key. To cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit the subprogram from its original state, enter N . (2) Editing a ladder diagram (a) Start Display the program list screen. Position the cursor to the program indicated by j, then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key. nc The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below, appears. EDIT (LADDER) ORIGinal RC4 ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ Ÿ ŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸ .c [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1.#LA]PMC–RC4 SUB71 SP NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS ŸŸ ŸŸ P0001 R000.0 ACT w SUB 8 MOVE 1100 0111 D000 D010 AD=X0.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO.1 CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 function 6 (a) (b) (c) P0001 Y000.0 X000.0 w w <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥] 7 000014/000014 000012 8 9 (d) 10 comand Fig.3.5.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Editing Screen (i) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. (For the [View] command, see (j) ”Combining a sequence program” 120 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (ii) The line shows the name of the file which is being edited, number of the net which is displayed on the screen, and the number of program steps/maximum number of steps that can be edited. (iii) The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label number (L address). (iv) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at the address selected by the cursor. AD=X000.0 : Address on which the cursor is placed 2) SY=SAMPLE: 00001 Symbol data Total number of symbols 3) RCO=RELAY SAMPLE : 00012 r.c Relay comment data Total character numbers of relay comment CCO=TEST DATA No. 1 : Coil comment data 0030/00030 Total character number of coil comment output to object file/Total character number of coil comment. ce nt e 4) om 1) (b) Function key indications and selection The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below. 1) 2 3 2) [COMAND] 2 Delnet ↓ 5) 5 function 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search .c 1 insnet 4 6 7 nc 1 ↓ 6) 6 Copy ↓ 7) 8 7 Move ↓ 8) or 8 File ↓ 8) 9 or 10 comand ↓ [comand] 9 syEdit ↓ 9) 10 Zoom ↓ 10) 2 (R) 3 4 5 netcmt 6 page 7 8 9 10 w (S) w 3) Under condition 1), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items. 1 w 4) Under condition 2), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items. 1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10 3 Inselm 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5) [Delnet] 1 exec 2 cancel 6) [Insert] 1 Insnet 2 Inslin 121 2) 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 7) [Search] 1 top 2 bottom 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–srch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10 8) [Copy] / [Move] 2 cancel 3 search ↓ 1 to * 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–[1] 7 to–org 8 * [to-org] is displayed in the [File] command mode only. om 1 until 9 10 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 ce nt e 1 exec r.c 9) [File] Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired processing from a POP-UP menu. 10)[syEdit] 9 10 (c) Ladder program input For ladder program input, select [LADDER] from the editing menu. The function key programmer menu is displayed. When no sequence program has been entered, the screen displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram. At this stage, program input can be started. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram. Examples of basic instruction program input and function instruction program input are shown below. w w w .c nc Notes While the function keys of 1) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of 2) can be executed. For example, entering A and [COMAND] on the 1) screen has the same effect as selecting F4 [Adress] on the 2) screen. To select a command of 2) in this way, enter the upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter) in the corresponding command name shown on the 2) screen. 122 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (i) Example of basic instruction program input Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ X0.1 D30.2 ŸŸ ŸŸ F14.2 Y52.7 om X2.4 ce nt e r.c [Operation] 1) Move the cursor to the start position, then press ]. [ The [ ] symbol appears on the screen. The message ”HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL” appears at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message warns the user that horizontal ladder diagram line creation is not completed. Enter an address and bit data. 2) Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the Enter key. The address is set at the contact, and the cursor moves right. 3) As in 1) and 2), enter contact A of D30.2. 4) Enter contact B of F14.2. Press [ ] and enter address F14.2, then press the Enter key. The address is set on contact B and the cursor w w w .c nc moves right. 5) Without moving the cursor, press [ ]. A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn automatically and a relay coil symbol appears near the right vertical rail. 6) Enter address Y52.7, then press the Enter key. The cursor automatically moves to the input start position on the next line. 7) Next, enter an OR condition. Press [ ] and enter address X2.4, then press the Enter key. The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right. 8) Press [ ] to enter a horizontal line. To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the horizontal line key [ ]. The line segment will be entered as many times as the number entered. Note, however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical rail. 9) A vertical line extending upward is required for OR. Press [ ] to enter a vertical line extending upward. (ii) Example of function instruction program input For function instruction input, press the function key 123 The function instruction diagram shown above appears. remaining three parameters one by one. MOVE ffff ffff ffff ffff (1) (2) (3) (4) w w w . Next. enter the parameters of the function instruction vertically as shown below. MOVE fff. enter SUB number 8. then press the Enter key. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [functn]. The cursor moves right. (SUB 8) Control condition ce nt e Output address Input data address Low–order 4–bit logical multiplication data High–order 4–bit logical multiplication data ŸŸ When entering a function instruction with this function. Press [ ]. Press the [functn] key.c nc SUB 8 ← ← ← ← [Operation] 1) Enter a control condition. key.f (1) ffff (2) ffff (3) ffff (4) ffff r. enter the high–order 4–bit logical multiplication data of the first parameter. enter an address and bit data.3. Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen from the function instruction table. Next. If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or SUB number. Next. then press the Enter key. then press the Enter key.c Ÿ Ÿ ACT om A function instruction can also be entered by entering the function instruction name or SUB number and pressing the [functn] key. 3) Enter the parameters of the function instruction. enter a SUB number. The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] key without entering any data. Then the function instruction table is automatically displayed. First. 2) Enter a function instruction. then press the Enter cursor automatically moves downwards. a function instruction table that lists function instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be displayed on the screen. The Enter the (iii) Restrictions and notes on ladder editing [Restrictions] 1) Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portion between the RD and WRT instructions) 124 . the following message appears for a net that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded. b) How to obtain the number of lines per screen Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen. – When the number of control conditions < number of parameters 125 .” In this case. the error described below occurs.” (a–2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 nc ce nt e r. the following message appears. and no net is displayed. all lines of the net are included in the total for that screen. “The NET being created is too large. In addition.c Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ← 1 line ← 2 lines (b–2) Function instructions The number of lines in a function instruction is: The number of control conditions or parameters. the following message appears. whichever is greater. a) Symptom (a–1) When there are more than 70 lines per net. and the display of the current net is discontinued.c om a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the corresponding mnemonic program). w w w .” If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets.” If 70 lines are exceeded. The number of lines in each net to be displayed is determined as follows: (b–1) Basic instructions One line is comprised of one basic instruction. the following message appears: “A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded. 2) Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per screen If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen. specify the net to be displayed. no net is displayed. “A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded. a space line between nets is counted as a valid line. “The NET being created is too large. using the ladder diagram search function (such as net number search).” If there are more than 256 steps. plus 1 Examples of calculation follow. the following message appears. “The NET is larger than the editing buffer. E SUB 49 DISP 0011 0003 w w w . CODB. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 RST ACT SUB 36 ADDB 1004 R000 Ÿ Number of control conditions = 2 Number of parameters = 4 Number of lines = number of parameters + 1 = 5 lines R010 om R020 – When the number of control conditions > number of parameters RST SUB 11 PARI R100 nc ce nt e ACT Ÿ Ÿ Number of control conditions = 3 Number of parameters = 1 Number of lines = number of control conditions + 1 = 5 lines r.c O. or DISP instruction is calculated as follows: – When the data table is one or two bytes Number of lines = number of data tables/6 (+ 1 if there is a remainder) Ÿ Ÿ D300 000 003 006 009 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Number of lines in the data table section = 11/6 = 1 with remainder 5 = 2 lines – When the data table is four bytes Number of lines = number of data tables/4 (+ 1 if there is a remainder) 126 .3.c ACT (b–3) Data table section of function instructions The data table section of the COD. the net consists of 70 lines.The number of lines in net B is 2. ACT SUB 49 DISP nc Net A 0011 0003 ŸŸ D300 000 003 006 009 Net B w w w .c Screen display section Net C 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ c) Examples of symptoms Example of symptom (a-1) .Number of lines in net A Function instruction section + 8 lines data table section = 6 lines (3+1) (11/6) .3. the number of lines in the screen display section is obtained as follows: . This is because when the total number of steps is 396.c (b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per screen For the ladder shown below. . 127 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 RST SUB 27 CODB ACT Ÿ 0005 0007 D300 000 002 004 00000000 00000000 00000000 om D320 00000000 00000000 Number of lines in the data table section = 5/4 = 1 with remainder 1 = 2 lines ce nt e r.The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B.The ladder diagram can be edited only when the ”total number of message data steps” parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than or equal to 396. For example. the MOVE instruction (SUB 8) cannot be entered. the latter basic instruction can be entered. the following message is displayed.A basic instruction net cannot be entered together with another basic-instruction net. if the basic instruction net has 68 lines.” Example of symptom (a-2) . Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ce nt e Display screen RST SUB 8 w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 r.c om If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more is created during mnemonic editing.If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function instruction on the same screen as that of a basic instruction. if a 68-line basic-instruction net is followed by another basic-instruction net.c nc MOVE Number of MOVE instruction lines = number of parameters (4) + 1 = 5 68 + 5 = 73 lines <Measure> If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled. 128 . . “The data table is too large. the following message appears. the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered. and the attempt is rejected. (because the total number of lines exceeds 70). the MOVE instruction can be entered. if the total number of lines is greater than 70.” For example. “The NET being created is too large. and the display of the net is discontinued. ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Display screen 68-line net 68-line net No more lines can be entered. The results of calculation are described below. <Measure> If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled.3. and the attempt is rejected. 3) Restriction on the maximum number of steps The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows: Without EMS : 21840 steps With EMS : 32000 steps Note. If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable number of steps. if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message data steps for the DISP instruction (SUB 49).” This symptom also occurs in a combination of two DISP instructions and a combination of CODB and COD instructions.3.c RST om .When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISP instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the same screen. if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200. the total number of steps for the DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum.55 . the following message appears. w w w . depending on how memory is used.c nc 196 00000000 00000000 198 00000000 00000000 ACT SUB 49 DISP Ÿ Ÿ Function instruction section =4 parameters + 1 Data table section =200/4 = 50 Calculation of DISP instruction data items that can be entered Function instruction sections =3 parameters + 1 Number of remaining lines =70 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 SUB 27 ACT CODB Ÿ Ÿ 000 00000000 00000000 002 00000000 00000000 & Number of CODB instruction lines = 55 ce nt e Display screen 0004 0200 4 bytes 200 data tables r. “The NET being created is too large. that the maximum allowable number of steps can decrease.4 = 11 lines Data tables =11*6 = 66 <Measure> Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen makes it possible to set the total number of steps to 396. For example. The calculation results are shown below. however. editing is disabled and the following message is displayed: MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER 129 . Move the cursor to a program section to be changed. To terminate the programmer menu.3. without addresses) or invalid. 2 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.c 1 insnet 2 inslin Esc key. 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ↓ 3 inselm As described below. Use [Delnet] (net deletion) to delete this symbol.) ce nt e (d) Replacing sections of a sequence program Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced in the same way as described in Item (c) above. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 r. this restriction does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic format. (See Item (6) in this section. D When a vertical line affects addition 130 . A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled. there are four types of sequence program addition in a ladder diagram. then enter item(s) in the way described in Item (c) above. This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with [ ]. it is displayed over several lines with a continuation symbol. then enter new data. press the 1 insnet 2 Delnet nc [Insert] 3 Insert w w w . When a sequence program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit. However.c om Notes 1 An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (for example. (e) Sequence program addition Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys indicated below. (i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line D Addition on a line Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ To be added Move the cursor to the position to add item(s). move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines. 5) Press [ ] to add a contact. then press [ horizontal line and vertical line are created.3. A to the right of the cursor.c 2) Press [ ] to delete the vertical line to the left extending upward. an area is required for the addition. ce nt e r. 4) Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact is to be added. After line addition. 4) When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numeric value. 131 . [Operation] 1) Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines. then press the [insnet] key. the lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted one line down to create an area for addition. one line is inserted. To create such an area. (ii) When a line is added vertically w w w . any remaining area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area large enough for three lines) can be left as it is. Each time the [insnet] key is pressed. To do this. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ To be added Ÿ Cursor om [Operation] 1) Move the cursor to the position shown above. 3) When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering a numeric value. 2) Press [insnet]. Make an addition in this area. This disappears.c nc Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ To be added ŸŸ To add a line vertically. The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line. the lower part of the ladder diagram must be shifted down by one line. the number of lines specified is inserted. 3) Press [ ] to create a vertical line extending upward ]. If the character A is prefixed to the number of elements to be inserted and the [inselm] key is pressed.) r. [Operation] 1) Enter the number of elements to be inserted. w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 5) Move the cursor to the desired position and press [ ].) Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Cursor If the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand figure. Then set address data and press the Enter key. just one element is inserted. ] soft key to create an OR circuit. The cursor moves right. Cursor 132 Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ . The entered number of elements is inserted. (If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering the number of elements to be inserted.3. just one line is added.c nc (iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program Elements are added one by one. 6) Press the [ om (iii) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program Blank lines are inserted one by one. (When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number. elements are inserted after the cursor.c Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ce nt e Cursor If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positioned as shown in the left-hand figure. [Operation] 1) Enter the number of lines to be inserted. an element is inserted as shown in the following figure. then press the [inselm] key. The element is inserted before the cursor. then press the [inslin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted. a blank line is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure. move the cursor to the first net to delete. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 If the character A is entered and the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand figure. If the [c-down] key is pressed after a numeric value is entered. 4) When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand. or [search] key. (ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an RD instruction to a WRT instruction). [c-down] key. Cancellation: Press the [cancel] key. relay coil. then display the nets to be deleted in red. then press the [Delnet] key. The net to be deleted is displayed in red.3. (g) Searching in a sequence program A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys: 1 Insnet [Search] 1 top 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–crch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10 ↓ 2 bottom 133 . Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor.c [ om (i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted and pressing one of the below three soft keys [ ] : Deletes a horizontal line. 2) Deleting multiple nets Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key. (f) Deletion in a sequence program ] : [ ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the left of the cursor. the cursor moves as many times as the entered numeric value. steps 1) and 2) can be omitted. 3) Execution : Press the [exec] key. With this operation. r. ce nt e (iii) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.c nc [Operation] 1) Deletion Move the cursor to the net to be deleted. etc. an element is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure. then press the [Delnet] key. relay contact. Deletion except: Press the [exclud] key. The element is inserted after the cursor. Exclude nets except specified nets in 2). enter the number of nets to delete. 1 Insnet [Delnet] 1 exec 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10 ↓ 2 cancel w w w . When the specified address is found. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (i) [top] When this key is pressed. This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. If the search operation fails to find the specified address. 1) Address specification using the cursor Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for.c om (iii) [srch] Search operation using this key searches the program for a specified address from the current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. ce nt e r.6 Y49. If the search operation fails to find the specified address. move the cursor to this position.1 D32. G11. an error indication appears. 4 X0. An address to search for can be specified in one of two ways. it is displayed on the screen.2 When the same address is found.1 Ÿ Ÿ X0. then press the [srch] key.1 D21. This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. the cursor does not move. 0 F54.0 When the same address as this address is to be searched for. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found address. the section of the program containing the address is displayed on the screen.1 nc X2. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found address. 134 .2 X14. 2) Address specification by address input Enter the address to find with the keyboard. the start of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the start of the program. the section of the program containg the address is displayed on the screen. press the Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ F54. then press the [srch] key. G43.0 D35.3 w w w .c G17. To terminate searching. If the specified address is found.3 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Esc key. the cursor moves to this location. (ii) [bottom] When this key is pressed. When an address is found.2 X4.3. then press the [srch] key. 5 Y52. the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the end of the program. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ce nt e r. When a relay coil with the specified address is found. Searching is performed by entering a function instruction name or number. an error indication appears. or enter S followed by a function instruction number. When a relay coil is found.c om (iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search) This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with a specified address from the current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. The function instruction END1 is searched for. the section of the program containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil. then press a cursor key. w w w . The NET No. 135 . 1) Address specification using the cursor Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to search for. (viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH) Global searching in all main/sub-programs is enabled. the coil which is the closest to the cursor is displayed. If the [s-srch] key is pressed while the cursor is on a function instruction. an error indication appears. If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address. starting from the top of the screen.3. The function instruction is searched for. (vi) [s-srch] (function-instruction search) This key searches for function instructions. If multiple relay coils are found. The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in one of two ways. The address is searched for. the section of the program containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.c nc (v) [n-srch] (net-number search) This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number. then press a cursor key. function instructions with the same number as that function instruction are searched for. then press a cursor key. then press a cursor key. This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. (vii) Search operation using the cursor keys ( . ) D Enter an address or symbol.. When a relay coil with the specified address is found. then press the [w-srch] key. the display is advanced by one net. then press the [w-srch] key. This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. is searched for. then pressing the [s-srch] key. it is displayed on the screen. Example: Enter S1. If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number. 2) Address specification by address input Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the keyboard. D Enter a NET No. If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address. D Enter a function instruction name. D Operation The global search is operated with the following function key. whether to save or quit modifications is inquired. the program which is currently displayed will be closed. At this time. b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one. The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address. Then. in case there are modifications in the program to be closed. 1) 1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand [comand] 136 ↓ . In case of finding in another program. c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is small next to a). key Esc 1st net of LEVEL1 5) X X ce nt e 6) 7) 8) ← cursor 1) ← displaying on the screen Whole program one of subprograms 2) 3) X X Final net of the maximum numbered subprogram nc 4) (Searching in the order of 1) to 8)) D Searching result w w . d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a). OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om D The range of search All programs. will be opened to display the object position with the cursor.c When the object of search is found. G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the r. which include a currently displayed subprogram.3. are searched for. the result of search are displayed in order of 1) one by one.c or the [cancel] key. the cursor will move to the position. a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currently opening subprogram. the program which contains the object. w When two or more objects exist. c) End of “G-SRCH” mode ”G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing Esc or [cancel] key. w w w Esc = .[cancel]= . for how to specify the target of global search. in case there are modifications in the program which is currently displayed.c nc - Only “G-SRCH” mode is ended. all programs are searched unless quitting “G-SRCH” mode. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) [comand] 1 insnet 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 3) Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 2) 1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List 4) 1 2 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 6 s–srch 7 8 9 cancel 10 + [COMMAND]”) r. b) Execution of search Refer to “(c) [search]”/“(d) [w-srch]”/“(e) [s-srch]” in “(7)Searching in a sequence program”. The end method is different individually. Whether will save or quit modifications is inquired. After that.3.c (Shortcut command is “ G om [G–srch] ↓ ce nt e a) Starting of “G-SRCH” mode It switches to the mode of ”G-SRCH” by the operation of 1) → 3). The net can be copied in the same file that is being edited or into another file. It returns to the program which was opened at beginning the “G-SRCH” mode. 137 . The program on the opening now closes. The selected net remains as it was. (h) Copying sections of a sequence program A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net. Specify the net to be copied. The program on the opening now is the state as it is. or [search] key. The selected net or nets are copied immediately above the copy destination specified by the cursor.5. first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be copied. The selected net is displayed in yellow. The following message is displayed. Alternatively. 3) Setting the net or nets to be copied Press the [until] key. The cursor moves according to the specified value. then move the cursor to the net at the other end of the range to be copied by pressing the cursor up. 2) Copying two or more nets To select the nets to be copied.c [Copy] Range to be copied [until] Specified file Fig. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times.2. [c–up]. The selected nets are displayed in yellow. cursor down.2 (b) 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 ce nt e 1 insnet ↓ [Copy] 1 until 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10 1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10 w w w . enter a numeric value and press the [c–up] or [c–down] key. enter the number of times they are to be copied before pressing the [to] key. 138 . 4) Specifying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying the net or nets in the same file) Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the [to] key. [c–down].3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 File which is being edited ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ om [to– fil] r.3. 5) Specifying the copy destination using the [to–fil] key (Copying the net or nets into another file) 1) Press the [to–fil] key.c nc [Operation] 1) Copying a net Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net or nets can be moved to another place in the same file that is being edited or output to another file.c 4) If the selected destination file is present. Appends the copy to the selected file. then press the [Copy] key. Specify the net or nets to be copied.c nc (i) Moving sections of a sequence program A multiple–net sequence program can be moved net by net. Note Incorrect nets cannot be moved. w w w . enter the number of nets to be copied. place the cursor on the first net to be copied. the following POP–UP menu is displayed. Note Incorrect nets cannot be copied. The new copy replaces the previous data of the file. The selected net or nets are deleted. follow steps 1) to 6) for copying. 2).3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 If no program is specified. (LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing) 2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be copied and press the Enter key. 1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 9 syEdit 10 ↓ [Move] 1 until 8 File 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10 ↓ 1 to [Operation] Substituting [Move] for [Copy]. and 3) can be skipped. Steps 1). ce nt e F2 F3 r. F1 Update Quit Append Updates the selected file. 139 . Cancels output to the selected file. Select desired processing from the menu. The only difference between copying and moving is that the selected net or nets are deleted in moving. 6) If the nets to be copied are known beforehand. LATMP is created. 3) Select desired processing from the following POP–UP menu: Exec Cancel om F1 F2 The file already exists. 5.2 (C) Combining a Sequence Program nc Programs of model which is different from the specified model can be specified to the files of connection [TO] or enter [VIEW].5.#LA]PMC–RC4 w SUB71 SP <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥] NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS Ÿ P0001 P0001 Y000.3.0 AD=X0. The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited separately. no errors will be detected even if the file to be combined contains an address range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error will be detected in compilation.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO. then combined to the original source program that is being edited.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File] Command 140 .1 CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 000014/000014 000012 8 9 10 comand Fig.3.0 w X000. i) Function keys 2 Delnet .2.c Section to be edited File to be combined (view file) om [TO] Combine File being edited (original file) Source file Edited file to be combined ce nt e Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (j) Combining a sequence program A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited. a warning message is displayed.c 1 Insnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 ORIGINAL=Initial display at opening the file VIEW=Display opened by [File] command Model of PMC edited in VIEW screen ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ Ÿ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ w EDIT (LADDER) View RC4 [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1. Original screen View screen [VIEW] File to be combined ŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽ Input Edit [TO] Combine r. be extremely careful to continue the operation.3.2.) In this case.) When ignoring the warning message. (If a disagreement is found. Fig.c Edit the Ladder program on the view screen (Normal editing) w Press the <POP –UP menu> (Save) key to terminate editing (Quit) Cancels the edited data w w Saves the Ladder program shown on the view screen Esc *1 (Edit) (Temp) Saves the data in a provisional work file Returns to the ladder diagram screen (The view screen is continued.3.) Specify a view file <POP–UP menu> (View) Shows the ladder diagram of the file to be combined (View screen) Cancels file input Combines the file with the Ladder program on the original screen 1.5.) *1: The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program 141 . Edit the data of the file to be combined and combine it (To) ce nt e (Cancel) r. Check the displayed data of the file to be combined 2. nc 1.2.c Press the [File] key .3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program Start ladder diagram editing (original screen) om Specify an insertion point (The data is inserted immediately above the cursor. The file is immediately combined. The data of the file is not displayed. ce nt e r. nc F1 F2 F3 To View Cancel terminate editing. select F1 (To). (Original screen) Example 2.c 5) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 1). select F1 (To). Then. 2) Select [File]. 8) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 1). 2) Select [File]. select F2 (View). OPERATION B–62884EN/01 iii) Examples Example 1. 2) Select [File]. Combining a specified section of a sequence program [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen. (Ladder editing can be performed and terminated in the conventional way.) 6) From the following menu. w . Combining a sequence program file [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen. press the w w Esc To key. (Original screen) Example 3. select F1 (Save). Combining a modified sequence program [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen. F1 F2 F3 To View Cancel om 4) From the following menu. 3) Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the Enter key. 4) From the following menu.3. 142 .c 5) Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 To View Rename & Save Edit Create Latemp file 7) Return to the screen of step 4) and check the name of the file output in step 6). 3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the Enter key. I (nsert) D(elnet) (sy)E (dit) S (earch) C (opy) M (ove) F (ile) The function keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations. Those portions that are enclosed in brackets can be omitted. select F2 (View). (l) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key. [cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the data. select F1 (Exec). Enter one of the character strings below.c F1 F2 ce nt e 8) The data is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 1). OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the Enter key. Exec Cancel r.) 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10 om 1 to 7) From the following menu. a symbol and comment added at the specified address can be edited. 6) From the following function menu. 1 Insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit ↓ [syEdit] 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10 [Operation] 1) Specifying an address To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram. (Original screen) (k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing screen On the ladder diagram editing screen. then press the [comand] function key. (Specify insertion into the original screen.c nc 1 to 10 right part of the screen. place the cursor on the corresponding address and press the [syEdit] key. The cursor moves to the comment field. 143 .3. 5) Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify a desired range with [until]. select [to–org]. 2) Editing the symbol and comment The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom w w w . Edit the symbol and press the Enter key. 3) Terminating editing [exec] key : Terminates editing after modifying the data. 4) From the pop–up menu. Moreover. w w w . Then the subprogram which is specified by the parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen. End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen) F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 144 Save(update) & quit Quit Rename.3. r.c (i) Start up of zoom 1) Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALL/CALLU instruction and push the key. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Note The keys [ or ] and [ or ] are used to create or delete a vertical line extending upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical line is for creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. The menu item applying to a function key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.c nc (ii) Start up under editing When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program. it is possible to return to the program configuration screen all at once. om (m) ZOOM Subprograms called by the currently selected program’s issuing of a CALL/CALLU instruction can easily be referenced and edited. F1 Save & zoom F2 Cancel (iii) End of ZOOM When the end operation with the Esc key is attempted in the program editing screen by ZOOM. ce nt e Ÿ Enter R001. the preservation of modifications will be inquired. it will return to the state when ZOOM is started. Select either.0 ACT SUB65 CALL P001 2) The program now on opening hides from the editing screen. Close the current program.save & quit Edit Main . save & quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started. 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 ce nt e 1 r.2 R120.0 R1000. ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Y2000.3 R100.1.c (Shortcut command is “ 6 L 7 8 9 10 List + [COMMAND]”) (o) To edit Net comment It is able to write the comments between ladder nets. 3) F3:Rename. These comments are called “Net comment”. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om 1) F1:Save(update) & quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started.4 2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down.0 R1000.2 Shift +[netcmt]”. (n) List of subprograms in use The list of subprograms called from currently displayed program is displayed. after the content of current program screen is cancelled.4 Y23. (i) To enter Net comment 1) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net comment.3. and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program. And then press “ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ R100. 145 . and the area for comment enclosed by ‘(*’ and ‘*)’ is inserted. after the content of current program screen is preserved into specified subprogram name.c (i) Operation The command ”List” is operated with the following function key. 1) 8 or 9 or 10 comand [comand] ↓ 2) [comand] 1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 nc 3) Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 2) 1 2 3 4 5 G–srch w w w . after the content of current program screen is preserved.1. 2) F2:Quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started. 0 R1000. *) (ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment 1) To determine the editing Net comment. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor. (* (* All characters you can enter are available. press [inslin]. and make a blank line at the cursor position. press [ end ] or .c R100. Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ Y2000. (* All characters you can enter are available. and type comment sentence onto the area.c nc Note The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one ASCII character as one byte.3.0 R1000. (* 146 *) *) *) *) . (iii) To modify Net comment 1) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press “ Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter . ‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment.2 R120. and the Net comment will be ready to modify its contents. (* Net comment is written in here.4 R100. one kanji character as two bytes. Then the editing comment is fixed. press [cancel]. *) (* All characters you can enter are available. and the Net ce nt e Esc comment editing mode is finished. Every Net comment can expands up to a hundred lines.2 om character cursor ↓ (* Net comment is written in here. 2) To cancel the editing Net comment. The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines display mode) automatically according to the comment sentences. to insert a blank line into Net comment. The new Net comment will be cancelled and erased.1. *) *) [inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line. 2) At Net comment editing mode.1. one Japanese kana as one byte. w w w . (* Net comment is written in here.4 r. Line feed is helpful to save memory for Net comment.3 ŸŸ Y23. The Net comment editing mode becomes active. 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin]. (* Net comment is written in here. (* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. (* All characters you can enter are available. (* *) *) *) *) om [dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one line. (* Net comment is written in here. (* All characters you can enter are available. *) *) or Esc . r.c 4) To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ] ce nt e 5) To cancel the modifications you have just made, press [cancel]. [cancel] will abandon the modifications and the Net comment will be restored as it was before the modifications. (iv) To delete Net comment There are two ways to delete Net comment. 1) Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets. ”[command] → [Delnet] → specify area to delete → [exec]” 2) Entering Net comment editing mode by w w w .c nc ” Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter with the cursor on the Net comment which you want to delete, and then press [delete]. (v) Lost Net comment A Net comment consists of the information of position in sequence program which is called “Net comment pointer”, and ”Net comment string data” which is comment sentences themselves. These two elements are usually combined one to one to make a Net comment, but the partner might be lost by illegal file operations or something, such as copying the ladder file “*.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file “NETCMT.000” by user. When a Net comment pointer loses its Net comment string data, the Net comment is called “Lost Net comment”. Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment enclosed by “(*” and “*)” which is displayed in purple or dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be edited as a normal Net comment, such as deletion, copying and so on. (p) To edit New page It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. This specification of the position is called “New page”, and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program. 147 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (i) To enter New page 1) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press “ Shift Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ +[ page ]”. ŸŸ ŸŸ Y2000.4 R100.1.0 R1000.2 R120.3 Y23.4 om R100.1.0 R1000.2 2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the mark of New page is inserted. Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ R100.1.0 R1000.2 ŸŸ ŸŸ r.c Y2000.4 R120.3 ŸŸŸŸ ce nt e <New page> Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ R100.1.0 R1000.2 Y23.4 nc (ii) Other operation to edit New page New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. The operations such as copying [ Copy ], moving [ Move ], and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective on New page. (q) Terminating editing of a sequence program [Operation] .c 1) Press the w w w 1 2 3 4 Esc key on the following editing screen. 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand 2) The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Save(update) & quit Quit Rename,save & quit Edit Main a) F1:Save(update) & quit After current content of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended. b) F2:Quit After current content of the editing is cancelled, the editing screen will be ended. 148 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 c) F3:Rename,save & quit After current content of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the editing screen will be ended. d) F4:Edit The Esc key operation is canceled and it returns to the ce nt e r.c om editing screen of former. e) F5:Main With the operation “a)”,“b)” or “c)”, it returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started. But with this operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at all once from the nested state. 3) Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the program configuration screen, the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started. 4) When error net exists When the error net exists, “ ERROR NET NO.” is displayed and the end menu is not displayed. Cope this case by the following. a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end operation will be done. b) When pressed Esc key in the state of 1) after “CAN” is typed (meaning of CANCEL), the menu of 2) will be displayed. - When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after removing the error net. - When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the state before editing by cancelling the content of the editing. nc (3) Step sequence diagram Position the cursor to a program marked with j], then press the [ZOOM] or Enter w w w .c as shown below: 149 key. The step sequence editing screen is displayed 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:¥FL¥DATA¥SFC01] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) ← L1 [ ]S1 P2 P10 S3 P3 S4 S11 P11 S15 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ P13 S13 P14 S14 P15 Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ← ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ← S20 P20 L2 S21 P21 S23 P22 S24 L4 S30 P30 om ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ S10 S31 P23 P31 L2 S23 r.c Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ]S2 1–1 ce nt e ↓ (Note ) 1–1 2–1 3–1 1–2 2–2 3–2 On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed, depending on the position of the cursor. When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is displayed. ← L4 w w w .c nc Note The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated. The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is positioned to any element on the screen. ]S2 1 V 2 [ j [ [j] [ j] [ | [ →JMP ] ] ] ] ] [V] : : : : : 3 S10 V] 4 S20 5 →JMP Step subprogram Initial step subprogram Block step subprogram Line for link Jump to label 6 ←LBL [ [ [ [ [ ←LBL ⊥ FUNC CHK ZOOM S30 ⊥ 7 ] ] ] ] ] 8 FUNC : : : : : 9 CHK 10 ZOOM Label for jump End of block step Various functions Grammatical checking Zooming into a subprogram When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed. 150 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 P2 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ) + ↓— ↓= = | ↑— ↑= = FUNC CHK ZOOM 2 ↓— ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] 3 : : : : : : : : : ↓== 4 – 5 ↑— P13 6 ↑== P20 ← L2 7 P30 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM Transition Divergence of selective sequence Divergence of simultaneous sequence Line for link Convergence of selective sequence Convergence of simultaneous sequence Various functions Grammatical checking Zooming into a subprogram om 1 P10 ce nt e r.c (i) Entering a step Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [j] key. Then, enter a step number and subprogram number. Pressing the [j] key causes a step to be created, as shown below. A free step number is automatically assigned. S1 STEP : S1 ACTION : V 2 [V] 3 nc 1 V] 4 5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 1–1 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM w w w .c The specified subprogram number (P10 in this example) is displayed below S1. S1 P10 STEP : S1 ACTION : P10 1–1 To change the step number, press the character cursor ” the number. 151 Enter ” on STEP and use the key to position the Back Space key to change 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 S1 STEP : S10 ACTION : P10 1–1 om (ii) Entering a transition Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [+] key. Enter a subprogram number Press the [+] key. ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S1 r.c [ P100 ce nt e ACTION : 1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4 5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 1–2 10 ZOOM Enter a subprogram number. ŸŸ [ ]S1 ACTION : P100 1–2 (iii) Divergence of selective sequence Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [↓—] key. w .c nc P100 ŸŸ ŸŸ w [ ]S1 w P 1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4 5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [↓—] key. 152 c [ P100 = = = = w w w ]S1 1–2 1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4 5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM (vi) Convergence of simultaneous sequence Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [↑==] key. 153 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ŸŸ ŸŸ [ ]S1 om (iv) Convergence of selective sequence Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [↑—] key.3. ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S1 S3 ce nt e S2 r.c [ ACTION : P100 1 ) 2 ↓— ↓== 3 4 5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 2–4 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM nc (v) Divergence of simultaneous sequence Position the cursor to the desired input position (transition line) and press the [↓==] key. ŸŸ ŸŸ . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ [ ]S1 = = = = = = = = = S2 S3 om = = = = = = = = = 1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4 r. enter a label name. Press the [→ JMP] key. [ ← L10 ]S1 P100 STEP : S1 ACTION : P10 1–1 (viii) Specifying a label jump Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line). Press the [← LBL] key. then press the [→ JMP] key. enter a label name. 154 . then press the [← LBL] key.c 2–4 5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM ce nt e (vii) Specifying a label for jump destination Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line).c Enter a label name. ← [ ]S1 P10 P100 nc LABEL : L10 1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4 5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 1–1 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM w w w .3. Then. Then. Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor. then press the Delete key. . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ← L10 [ ]S1 P100 P100 [ → ]S2 LABEL : om P100 1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4 Enter a label name.c nc P100 LABEL : L10 2–3 (ix) Deleting an element Position the cursor to the element to be deleted. two figures (elements) of a selective branch and transition are selected. To position the cursor displayed in reverse video. press the 155 Esc key. press the To restore the state shown above. Delete key.3. displayed in reverse video. ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ 5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM ce nt e ← L10 ]S1 r. ŸŸ ŸŸ [ ]S1 P100 In the example shown above.c 2–3 [ P100 [ P100 → L10 ]S2 w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ŸŸ ŸŸ [ ]S1 P100 If the Enter key is pressed in the state shown above.c Insert key. ŸŸ ŸŸ [ ]S1 P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = ]S2 S10 P2 P10 S3 S11 S20 P20 S21 STEP : S2 ACTION : P200 1–3 156 . press the To create an empty column. To create an empty row. the selective om branch is deleted and the following screen is displayed: ŸŸ [ ]S1 r.c P100 ce nt e To specify another figure. then press the w w w . Insert keys. press the Shift Insert and key. press the Delete key again. ŸŸ [ ]S1 nc P100 (x) Inserting an element Position the cursor to the desired insertion position.3. 3. ŸŸ [ ]S1 P1 Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Press the Insert key. ŸŸ [ ]S1 P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ S10 S20 ce nt e r.c nc = = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 S10 S20 P2 P10 P20 Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ S3 S11 STEP : S2 ACTION : P102 w w w S21 1–3 (xi) Search P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 S10 P1 P11 ]S2 S10 157 S20 P21 S20 .c ]S2 om = = = = = = = = = = = = = Press the Shift and Insert 1–3 key. The system starts searching through the part subsequent to the cursor. 158 . as shown below: P1 = = = = = = = = = = = ce nt e ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Se Co Mo mA Li ]S3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Step Action Label sYmbol Position Top Bottom w w w . A pop-up menu is displayed.c nc Then. then press the Enter key. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above. for example). as shown below: Another pop-up menu is P1 = = = = = = = = = = = ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Se Co Mo mA Li ]S3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Step Ac La search string:¥A sY Position Top Bottom ¥a Enter the step number to be searched for (S20.c Press the [F1] (Search) key. displayed. press the [F1] (Step) key. a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below: P1 = = = = = = = = = = = Search Copy Move mAin List Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ ]S3 S11 S21 om F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 r.3. c nc = = = = = = = = = = = F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Search Copy Move mAin List Press the [F2] (Copy) key.c (xii) Copying or moving an element Press the [F8] (FUNC) key. a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below: P1 w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 P1 = = = = = = = = = = = ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ Se Co Mo mA Li ]S3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Step Ac La search string:S20 sY Position Top Bottom P1 r. The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.3. om F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = S10 S20 ce nt e ]S2 P1 P11 P21 When the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed. P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 P1 S10 S20 P11 P21 ACTION : Specify Start position 159 1–2 . Assign a free number. P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Ÿ Ÿ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 S10 S20 P1 P11 P21 w w w . – The S address is not copied. then press the Enter key. P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S2 S10 S20 P1 P11 P21 = = = = = = = = = = = ACTION : Specify End position nc 3–4 Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3 Enter key. 160 . The system ce nt e prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.c in the example shown below). The system prompts the operator to enter the end point. then press the STEP : S10 ACRTION : P100 P11 P21 4–3 When a part is copied. P1 ŸŸ ]S2 S10 P1 P11 ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = P21 ACTION : Specify End position om S20 r. The specified part is copied.c 2–3 Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below).3. then press the Enter key. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example shown below). If required. change the address. – The P address is copied. ce nt e After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key P1 = = = = = = = = = = = Search Copy Move mAin List nc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 w w w . To return to the program configuration screen. (The result of the previous editing session is cancelled. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 S20 P11 P21 r.c After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) LEVEL V P0001 V P0008 ]P0021 S S V P0101 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 V P0002 V P0004 V P0009 V P0014 V P0022 V P0024 S S S S V P0202 V]P0304 V P0005 V P0015 V P0025 S S V]P0405 V P0006 V P0016 V P0026 S S V]P0406 V P0007 V P0017 V]P0027 S S V]P0407 If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended (marked with ∆]) is selected again for editing. is suspended. the following message is displayed: Editing this subprogram is not completed. from which the [ZOOM] key was pressed. follow the procedure below. Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.3. The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file. Otherwise.c P1 S10 om (xiii) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program configuration screen (MAIN). enter N. displayed when editing was started. The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram.) 161 . Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y] To continue the previous editing session. press the [Enter] key. c EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) V]P200 1 V P0008 V P0021 2 V P0009 V P0022 3 4 V P0014 V P0024 5 V P0015 V P0025 6 V P0016 V P0026 7 8 MAIN V P0017 V]P0027 9 CHANGE 10 ZOOM Following keys are useful in this screen. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (xiv) LIST The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequence subprogram that is currently being edited is displayed.c After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key = = = = = = = = = = = Search Copy Move mAin List ce nt e F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 nc After pressing the [F5] (LIST) key w w w . Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.3. Function key [ MAIN ] : Displaying the subprogram configuration screen [CHANGE] : Creating a new subprogram [ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram Other keys Page Up : Displaying previous screen Page Down : Displaying next screen 162 . P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S2 S10 S20 P11 P21 P1 om = = = = = = = = = = = P1 r. c = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 P1 S10 P11 S20 Check completed If the step sequence is invalid.3. the following message is displayed: P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ w w w . the following message is displayed: P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 P1 163 S10 P11 S20 Chart Sequence error . the subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in which they are nested.c Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently being edited are listed with the following mark: j : Ladder subprogram j] : Step sequence subprogram (xv) Checking the syntax Press the [CHK] key. V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017 ce nt e r. If the [ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the program to a certain depth. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Screen display V] P200 V P0008 V P0009 om The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. P1 ŸŸ ŸŸ = = = = = = = = = = = ]S2 P1 S10 S20 P11 P21 nc If the step sequence is satisfactory. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed first is displayed at the left end. P1 = = = = = = = = = = = P1 S10 S20 P11 P21 ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S2 S10 S20 om ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S2 r. P1 nc = = = = = = = = = = = w w w . save & quit Optimize Menus Menu Editing Result of editing Display Save End Updated Optimized Quit End Discarded – Edit Continue Continued Not optimized Rename End Updated Optimized Optimize Continue Optimized and continued Optimized 164 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (xvi) Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM) Press the [ZOOM] key.c When the [ZOOM] key is pressed.3.c F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit Rename. Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram [V] Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram V] Block step sequence subprogram step sequence subprogram + Transition Ladder subprogram ce nt e V (xvii) End of modifying Press the ESC key. the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram which is to be edited. 5. all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric characters are replaced with spaces.3. Shift . When a comment containing kana characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is compiled (an object file is created). . [ ] Address field [ ] Symbol field 165 [ ] [ Relay comment field ] Coil comment field . ce nt e r.3 Symbol and comment editing screen (2) Entering a new symbol and comment A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is assigned.3 Symbol & Comment Editing D Moving the cursor .c (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu. a comment can be entered in Japanese. Moves the cursor to another position within the field to be edited. 2) The following symbol and comment editing screen appears: EDIT (SYMBOL & COMMENT) RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ] SYMBOL 000000/000001 COIL_COMMENT 00000000/00000014 NO. + Moves the cursor to another field to be edited. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.0 SYMBOL–A 1 2 SEARCH 3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END Fig. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT RELAY COMMENT–A COIL COMMENT–A w w w .5. 2) An input window opens on the screen. [Operation] 1) Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.2. . om D Entering a comment in Japanese When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used.2.c nc 000001 X00000.3. [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the comment to be copied. or key and edit the data. When no symbols and comments are entered. 8) The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field. Comment data copied to paste buffer 4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved. . 6) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.c nc (4) Moving a comment A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address. while pressing the the or Shift key press key. w w w . 9) Enter coil comment data. 7) Enter relay comment data.3. select [QUIT] to exit from that state. Comment data copied to paste buffer 4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied. ce nt e 2) Move the cursor by pressing the . and comment data from the window. the system is automatically set to receive new data. 2) Select [COPY]. 10)The entered data is stored. [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the comment to be moved. 5) Enter symbol data. (5) Copying a comment A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address. 2) Select [DELETE]. 3) The following message appears on the screen. . [Operation] 1) If the system is set to receive new data. 5) Select [PASTE]. r. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om 3) Enter an address in the address entry field. clearing the previous address. To move the cursor within a field. symbol data. 4) The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field.c (3) Editing a symbol and comment A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited. 5) Select [PASTE]. 3) The following message appears on the screen. (6) Searching for a symbol or address 166 . 2) The following message appears on the screen: F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit 3) Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu. 3) Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted. The entire line is displayed in reverse video. 2) Select [DELETE]. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [Operation] 1) Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen. nc Selecting the area . 2) The following input window appears on the screen.c (7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment (a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the NO field. Only the selected symbol or comment is deleted.3. The cursor is moved to the searched data.c (8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing [Operation] 1) On the edit screen. w w w . All the data displayed in reverse video is deleted. Both the symbol and the comment are deleted. (b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field. 167 . (c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously [Operation] 1) Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted. SEARCH : om 3) Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data number. 2) Select [DELETE]. 4) The system searches for the symbol or address and the data number in that order. ce nt e r. 4) Select [DELETE]. and the following message appears on the screen... 2) Select [AREA]. select [END] or press the Esc key. the display of function-key changes as the undermentioned.1 00003*X00000. w w w . LINE NO. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (9) Editing screen Symbol entry number Output Number to object file / Total EDIT ( SYMBOL & ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ COMMENT ) <O>[A:¥FL¥DATA¥RB4 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090 RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT ] (Note) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB CCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC r. 2 ADRS 3 SYMBOL 4 RELAY 5 COIL 6 7 8 9 10 2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by function-key. by specifing a part of data strings.3.2 PMC-RB4 om SYMBOL 000001/000003 NO. A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL]. which is too long.c nc (10)Searching by a part of stringsSearch function is active for specified field. cursol moves to the found place. 2 SERCH 3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 ce nt e 1 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END Note It is the indicator.c 00001 X00000. ADDRESS SYMBOL Coil comment size (byte) Output Number to object file / Total ‘*’ means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI. 1 NO.0 00002 X00000. 3) If search is success. Furthermore. 1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search. Symbol/comment are displayed with turning at this point in ladder diagram editing screen. 168 ./ADDRESS/SYMBOL/RELAY or COIL COMMENT. Especially you can find relay/coil comment. 4 Message Editing An arbitrary message can be displayed on the screen. using the PMC-RC4 as an example. r. (a) Startup [Operation] 1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu. 169 . nc EDIT (MESSAGE) PMC–RC4 MESSAGE 001 A00.5. Such a message is created as described below. 2) The following message data edit screen appears.2.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen (b) Input [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered. 2 004 A00. 3 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ w w w .2. The number of characters is limited as follows: 1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used : 62 characters 2) When only half-size kana characters are used : 127 characters 3) When only alphanumeric characters are used : 256 characters ce nt e (2) Edit procedure The edit method that can be used varies between the CNC/PMC model in which Japanese language (excluding half-size characters) can be used and other models. 1 003 A00. 0 002 A00.3. This section describes the procedure common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered).5. Refer to the PMC programming Manual. which is one of the function instructions.c NO ADDRESS [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 1 2 TOP 3 BOTTOM 4 C–MODE 5 DISP 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. 2) Key in the desired message data. using the DISPB instruction (SUB 41). The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered using the kana and alphanumeric keys on the keyboard.c om (1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used The types of characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model to another. Japanese-language text can be edited using the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). Similarly to symbols and comments. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3. om Enter (d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM] [Operation] 1) On the message screen. 5) Press the key.2. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (c) Modification [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered. 3) Place the cursor at the location where modification is required. and return to the edit menu. select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].c (e) END [Operation] 1) On the edit screen.2. press [END] or Esc . 3. 4) Key in the desired characters to modify the message data. EDIT (I/O MODULE) PMC–RC <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME X0000 X0001 X0002 X0003 X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 Y0000 Y0001 Y0002 Y0003 Y0004 Y0005 Y0006 Y0007 Y0008 Y0009 Y0010 Y0011 Y0012 Y0013 Y0014 Y0015 0 0 1 SEACH 2 INPUT 0 0 3 HELP 01 ID16C 01 ID16C 4 5 6 DELETE 7 DELALL 8 9 Fig.5. ce nt e 2) The following message appears. using the cursor keys. 3.5 (a) I/O Module Edit Screen 170 10 END . 2) The cursor moves to the start or end message address. 2) The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there. F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit 3) Select one of the above items.5.c (1) Startup [Operation] 1) Select [MODULE] (I/O module) from the edit menu. 2) The following I/O module edit screen appears. nc I/O Module Editing w w w .5 The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described below. r.3. set to ’0’ if power ON/OFF information ‘##’ is to be allocated. 2) Select [DELETE]. 2) Key in the module address in the following format: GROUP. 2) Select [DEL. Selecting [HELP] can display the module names that can be displayed in the NAME field.c nc (ii) To delete all modules: [Operation] 1) Select [DELALL]. 2 The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows: “GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration. (3) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL] [DEL.3. 2) Place the cursor at the specified address. 2) The following message appears.NAME ce nt e r.SLOT. (iii) To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which more than one channel can be set): [Operation] 1) Select a channel for deletion.c om Notes 1 The module name that can be specified may vary depending on the model of the PMC or I/O unit.CH]. w w w .CH] (i) To delete one module: [Operation] 1) Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted. (4) Search [SEARCH] [Operation] 1) Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified. “SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the I/O Unit-B. 171 . and return to the edit menu. “BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (2) Setting [Operation] 1) Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.BASE. Alternatively. F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit 3) Select one of the above items. (5) END [END] [Operation] 1) On the edit screen. press [END] or Esc . 3. The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screen for PMC-RB. 1:BCD) (1–150%) (0–99%) (0:NO. 1:YES) PMC TYPE = RC4 w w <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.2. nc (4) System parameter editing screen and input items for PMC model [Example of Editing screen] EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) RC4 w . ce nt e (3) Termination [Operation] 1) Select [END] or press on the editing screen. Esc 2) The following message appears: F1 F2 F3 Save (update) & quit Quit Edit 3) Select a function key from the above. The screen display returns to the editing menu.6 (a) Note For other editing screens. For information about input items.6 (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing menu. 2) The system parameter editing screen appears. System Parameter Editing om (2) Input [Operation] 1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the and keys. see APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS 172 .5.c 2) Enter data. see Item (4) below. For each PMC model.5.2. r. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3. see Item (4) below.c 1) COUNTER DATA TYPE 2) LADDER EXEC 3) (UNUSED) 4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO 5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN 6) OPERATOR PANEL 7) KEY ADDRESS 8) LED ADDRESS 9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS 10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS : : 0 100% : : : : : : : 50% 000000H 0 (0:BINARY. First and second level processing time r.5ms ce nt e Note however. 5) OPERATOR PANEL (connecting an F0 machine operator’s panel) This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel is used with the FS0. Setting range 1 to 150 The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution period of 8 ms.c Setting 100% 150% 5ms 7. This setting reduces ladder scan time. Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in the language program storage area When there is no language program. that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels reduces the following processing times: D PMC screen display time D Language program processing time D Ladder processing time on the third level w w w . Initial value 50 Setting range 0 to 99 4) LANGUAGE ORIGIN This parameter specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a language program. 173 .c nc 3) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO As the language program and PMC screen display have the same priority. thus achieving high-speed ladder execution.3. specify 000000H. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [Input item] 1) COUNTER DATA TYPE This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR function instruction is to be binary or BCD. When YES is specified in this parameter. and an addresses for LED images transferred to the operator’s panel. a language program can be executed cyclically. specify the DI/DO addresses where the operator’s panel is actually connected. an address for key images transferred from the operator’s panel. this parameter specifies the percentage of the following processing times: D PMC screen display time D Language program processing time D Processing time of third-level Ladder program While the PMC screen is displayed. Initial value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD Initial value 100 om 2) LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time) This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder levels. (1) Compatible printers This software is usable with the printers listed below.3. Overview nc EPSON VP1000 (default setting) NEC PR201H FANUC PRINTER .5. Setting range X0 to X127. Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set. F2 w Specify output item Specify option [SETUP] F2 Setup menu [PRINT] F1 Start printing Fig. Offline menu [PRINT] w w (2) General flow of operation for printout. X1000 to X1019 (ii) KEY DO ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operator’s panel is actually connected. a program modification is required.3.6. 3.5.3 Printout 3. Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.c Note To use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER. om Setting range Y0 to Y127.3.1 A sequence program can be printed out. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES (i) KEY DI ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DI where the operator’s panel is actually connected.3. Y1000 to Y1014 (iii) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user programs.5.c (iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user programs.3. ce nt e r. For details.5. see Section 3.1 Operation Flow of Printout 174 . 4. w w w .) 3) Start printing by pressing F1 [PRINT].) 2) Set the desired output items.5.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. 2 Some print formats that cannot be set in step 1) may be set by editing the setting file.5.3. see Section 3. 4) Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.c 1 PRINT V V V 5 6 7 8 9 BREAK 10 END ce nt e Fig. (See Section 3.3.c Notes 1 Perform steps 1) and 2) only when the settings must be changed.5. For details. 5) Press F10 [END] or the Esc key to terminate the print menu nc display.3.3.3.2 Printing is performed according to the following procedure. 175 .3.3.2 Drawing Output Menu [Operation] 1) Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP].5.5. (See Section 3.5. Starting and Ending Printing PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE V LADDER DIAGRAM V STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM V V I/O MODULE MESSAGE V CROSS REFERENCE LIST V BIT ADDRESS MAP 2 SETUP 3 4 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : [NO/YES] [NO/YES] [NO/YES] [OPTION] [NO/YES] [OPTION] [NO/YES] [OPTION] [NO/YES] [NO/YES] [OPTION] [NO/YES] [OPTION] [NO/YES] [OPTION] om TITLE SYSTEM PARAMETER SYMBOL & COMMENT r. [ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil comment data. [COIL] : Prints coil comment data. Output Item Setting (1) Specifying output of each data item Specify whether a data item is to be output.3(a) Symbol Print Option Menu i) Option (symbol printing) · When printing symbol/comment data.5. by pressing the or key after positioning the cursor with the key key or om key on the drawing output menu screen.c nc V V V 1 0 [RELAY/COIL/ALL] F10 (ESC) : END 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. When 0 is specified as the print end line number.3. 3. enter the desired key. (b) Parameter printing The data of the system parameters is printed. position the cursor to the desired option.c value. · Comment specification [RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.3. (c) Symbol printing The symbol comment data is printed.3. 176 . specify an output range. then press the ce nt e (3) Detail of each data time (a) Title printing The data of the title is printed. The option specification screen will appear. all data up to the last line is printed.5.3 Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE [ SYMBOL PRINT ] START LINE NUMBER END LINE NUMBER APPOINT COMMENT : : : w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. (d) Ladder diagram printing A ladder diagram is printed. More than one item can be specified at a time. depending on the model of the PMC. (2) Option specification When specifying a data item for which options are available. Some set items may not be displayed. Enter r. To set the option. then press the Enter key. 3.5.3 (h)) · Relay information [SYMBOL] : Prints symbol data. · If a page break is specified.5. [RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data. and cross-reference of a ladder diagram to be printed are specified.3.3. · If a diagram is output as a list file. (Fig. (e) Printing of step sequence figure Step sequence figure is printed i) Option (Step sequence figure printing) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE w [ STEP SEQUENCE PRINT ] V w V PRINT UNIT MODULE NAME SUB–PROGRAM : : : [ALL / MODULE] [NO/YES] F10 (ESC) : END 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.3. 3. page break. · If a cross-reference is specified. net range. 3. · If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE [ LADDER PRINT ] V V V V PRINT UNIT MODULE NAME NET RANGE START NET NUMBER END NET NUMBER NEW PAGE SUBPROGRAM CROSS REFERENCE RELAY INFORMATION : : [ALL / MODULE] : : 1 0 : : : [NO/YES] [NO/YES] [SYMBOL/RELAY COMENT] F10 (ESC) : END 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END r.c nc ce nt e i) Option (ladder diagram printing) · The output unit.5.3(b) Ladder Print Option Menu PRINT w . the ladder diagram is accompanied with a cross-reference.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu 177 .3.c 1 om V Fig. the unit of printout must be specified as a module. a page break is made in the ladder diagram at every new file or subprogram. printing continues up to the last net. (g) Message printing The message data is printed.c i) Option (message printing) · The range of messages to be printed is specified.0 : S00001/N00001 Y0.3.5.5. (f) I/O module printing The I/O module data is printed.3.3. F1 : DISPLAY CROSS REFERENCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 F10 (ESC) : END 7 8 9 10 END Fig.0 () (/) : S00001/N00002 STEP No.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu .3.3. PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] r. PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] w C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE [ CROSS REFERENCE LIST PRINT ] w V V V CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE APPOINT ADDRESS APPOINT COMMENT : : : [NO/YES] ALL [RELAY/COIL] w [ PRINT FORMAT ] X0.0 :A124. (h) Cross-reference list printing A cross-reference list is printed.7 ce nt e V F10 (ESC) : END 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END nc Fig.c C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE [ MESSAGE PRINT ] ADDRESS RANGE START ADDRESS END ADDRESS : :A000.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu 178 . · SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed for each step. specify the subprogram name for MODULE NAME./NET No. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om · PRINT UNIT Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for a single subprogram or all subprograms. When printing a figure for a single subprogram. nc APPOINT COMMENT Specify the kind of comment data ‘RELAY’ Print Relay comment.5.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu 179 .0-F12. R.3. . In this example. G. w PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE w [ BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT ] PUTPUT ADDRESS APPOINT ADDRESS : : [ALL/USED] [ALL] w V V F10 (ESC) : END 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. A.c Specified bit addresses only Note1 When an address specification is made.c (i) Bit address map The bit address map is printed. K. addresses are output in the sequence: X.3.5.0 Byte address X10 Specified byte addresses (including bit addresses) Address range F10. · APPOINT ADDRESS Specify the range of printing address. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 i) Option · CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE Check multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of same number functional instruction (ex. ‘COIL’ Print Coil comment.3. C. timer. T. P. F. D. variable address.3-END (Note 1) All addresses after a specified address All addresses having a specified initial letter ce nt e r. counter).3. Table 3. It can be specified as below.7 All addresses in a specified range X2. Y.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification Example of keying in Address to be output om Address specification mode ALL ALL All addresses Initial letter of an address Y Bit address R1. Y and all subsequent addresses are output. therefore. 0 nc N00591 F 3485 SUB66 CALLU ### *) *) *) *) ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ Relay X0.3.) ‘USED’ The addresses which are used in a sequence program are printed. (Including ‘Not used’ addresses. 2 X0.0 Relay X0.3.5.c Relay X0.3 (g) Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data 180 .0 ACT PAGE1 Net No. 3. [¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P2] *** N00588 C 3457 N00589 D 3480 (* (* (* (* X01.3 in ‘(h) Cross Reference’.3. · Address specifications Specify the range of outputting addresses.3.0 N00590 E 3463 P2 X0.5.0 Relay X1.0 Relay Y0. refer Fig. ### P2 FORMAT–C ladder data source name = rb4_step SUB PROGRAM NO. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ om i) Option (Bit address map) · Output address ‘ALL’ All available addresses are printed.0 SUB65 CALL X0.0 *** r. For details.0 Coil comment Y0.c N00587 B 3455 SUB71 SP LADDER DIAGRAM ce nt e N00586 A 3453 Fig.0 SUB69 LBL L9999 ### L9999 ### w w w N00592 G 3468 Y01.0 00008 00032 00038 00291 00315 00321 00594 00618 00624 00764 00770 P4 P2000 ACT SUB68 JMP8 L9999 . 3.c Address S00268/N00107 ce nt e S00261/N00106 S00254/N00105 w w w . MULTIPLE COIL USED om Y0.5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 [¥FLADDER¥SAMPLE] *** Cross reference *** PAGE2 STEP No.3 CTR NO. Symbol : U11–O U11 ON S00055/N00024 : U12–O U12 ON S00057/N00025 S00249/N00104 : S00041/N00017 Y0.1 MULTIPLE USED S00247/N00104 CTR NO.3.2 Y0./NET No.1 Comment r.2 CTR NO3.3.c nc Fig.3 (h) Example of Printout with a Multiple Coil Write Check Indication 181 . L1 j S210 P101 Label j S211 j P151 P152 j Divergence of selective sequence Divergence of simultaneous S215 j S217 sequence P161 P165 Convergence of simultaneous P162 sequence P160 S212 j P153 S216 P163 P154 P164 Step Convergence of selective sequence j ] S1000 P2000 nc Block step P102 > L1 S1 P1 Initial step Transition P100 L1 S210 P101 P150 : : S211 P151 : P152 : : S212 P153 : P154 Label + Divergence of selective P160 sequence Divergence of simultaneous : S215 * S217 sequence P161 : P165 Convergence of simultaneous P162 sequence * : + ce nt e P150 : I* : : + : <* : : + : : * : : + : : * : : + : : B* : : + : : -> om [ j ] S1 P1 r.c <graphical mode printout> S216 P163 + 164 Step Convergence of selective sequence S1000 P2000 Block step P102 Jump L1 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (1) Printout example by ”F2[SETUP]” (print menu) <ASCII mode printout> Initial step P100 Transition <.3.3(i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (1/2) 182 .c Jump * : w (2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]” <Print sub program number> w <Not print sub program number> [ j ] S1 w [ j ] S1 P1 P100 <.3.5.3.L1 j S210 P150 P155 Sub prograrm number P100 <.L1 j S210 P101 P160 P150 P155 P160 Fig. 5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (3) Printout example of more than one page.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2) 183 . (1/3) ce nt e Note) Link number (3/3) < > 5=> v1 v2 v3 v2 v3 (2/3) 4=> =>4 w w w v1 .3.3.3.Number of a sub program Fig. Size of one page om 22 element r.c (28 element) 14 element The maximun element count for printing without sub-program number is given in parentheses.c nc =>5 <. c by pressing the . w w w . 10 INCH/ASCII) with the .3. Print Format-1: SETUP Menu PRINT (SETUP) V RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥] PAPER SIZE/LADDER PRINT : INCH INCH INCH INCH / / / / ASCII GRAPHIC ASCII GRAPHIC 1 2 3 r. 2) The SETUP menu screen appears.. or key. 184 . In addition.c om D 10 10 15 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END ce nt e Fig.3. nc 5) Position the cursor to the desired item (e. 3) Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g. the screen display returns to the output item selection screen. 6) If F10 [END] is selected after forms selection. then make the selection key. key.5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen [Operation] 1) Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.3.. Enter .5.4 Specify printer forms and a print format as described below. (1) Forms size/ladder diagram print format Specify a forms size. forms size/ladder diagram print format) with the 4) Select the item by pressing the Enter or key. The currently specified output format is indicated by “F”. specify whether to print the ladder diagram in character format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).g. 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.5.3.5 Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially available text editor so that the output format shown in each of the following frames can be changed. ÁÁÁÁÁÁ AMROFTRP. DAT Diagram output 1. Change the paper selection name ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ PR201-10 PR201-15 PR201-A4 PR10-A PR15-A PRA4-A ESC-P-10 ESC-P-15 ESCP10-A ESCP15-A FANUC-10 2. Set the top margin 3. Set the net spacing ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ CROSSINF. DAT (Setting the cross-reference list output format) INF INF INF INF INF INF INF INF INF INF INF ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ r.c 4. Set the printer model and paper . . . . . . . . . . . om Print Format-2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/Message File) ce nt e 5. Set the line spacing 8. Set the output format guidance information 6. Set the left margin 9. Set the output information 10.Specify the output format 11.Set the read/write coil guidance information 12.Specify the linefeed 13.Specify the page break nc ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ (Message file) .c 7. Set the title of printout (1) Changing the paper selection name This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format selection. Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT w w w For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here. Point of change Settings #10-A=10-inch/ASCII #10-G=10-inch/graphic #15-A=15-inch/ASCII #15-G=15-inch/graphic #A4L-A=A4 portrait/ASCII #A4L-G=A4 portrait/graphic Arbitrary character string consisting of up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size) characters Note #A4L-A=and #A4L-G=are unavailable in the output to VP1000. 185 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (2) Setting the top margin This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram. Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT Point of change Settings TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 (for each form) Decimal number N00005 E Y0.7 00001 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.7 00001 Y0.1 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.1 Y0.7 00001 When LCNTL=4 N00004 D Y0.7 00001 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.7 00001 Y0.0 *00006 Y0.1 ce nt e N00004 D N00003 C r.c N00003 C om (3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER net By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below. Y0.1 N00005 E Y0.2 *00008 Y0.7 00001 Y0.2 *00008 When LCNTL=5 Name of file to be edited w w w .c nc AMROFTRP.DAT 186 Point of change Settings LCNTL=4 (Set for each sheet) Specify either 4 or 5 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (4) Setting the printer model and print paper This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified at paper selection. *.INF that can be set Printer name Print paper type/print mode PR10 A PR201 10 ESCP10 A ESC P 10 FANUC 10 . . . . . INF INF INF INF INF PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 FANUC printer 10-inch continuous form/ASCII 10-inch continuous form/graphic 10-inch continuous form/ASCII 10-inch continuous form/graphic 10-inch continuous form/ASCII #10-G : : C FILE= PR10 A PR201 10 ESCP10 A ESC P 10 FANUC 10 . . . . . INF INF INF INF INF PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 FANUC printer 10-inch continuous form/ASCII 10-inch continuous form/graphic 10-inch continuous form/ASCII 10-inch continuous form/graphic 10-inch continuous form/ASCII #15-A : : C FILE= PR15 A PR201 15 ESCP15 A ESC P 15 . . . . INF INF INF INF PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII 15-inch continuous form/graphic 15-inch continuous form/ASCII 15-inch continuous form/graphic #15-G : : C FILE= PR15 A PR201 15 ESCP15 A ESC P 15 . . . . INF INF INF INF PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 #A4L-A : (Note) : C FILE= PRA4 A PR201 A4 . INF . INF PR201 PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic #A4L-G : (Note) : C FILE= PRA4 A PR201 A4 . INF . INF PR201 PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic r.c om #10-A : : C FILE= 15-inch continuous form/ASCII 15-inch continuous form/graphic 15-inch continuous form/ASCII 15-inch continuous form/graphic nc AMROFTRP. DAT Point of change ce nt e Name of file to be edited w w w .c Note #A4L-A and #A4L-G are unavailable in the output to VP1000. (5) Setting the line spacing This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram. The file to be edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4. Name of file to be edited *.INF Point of change LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (1B) number>) ; LDRLPI (H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B) number>) ; (T15) ; Settings (C) (T<decimal (C) (T<decimal (6) Setting the left margin This item can specify the left margin of a diagram. The file to be edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in (4). Name of file to be edited *.INF Point of change LMARGIN (L000) ; 187 Settings (H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B) (C) (L<decimal number>) ; 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (7) Setting the title of printout This item can change the title of a diagram. Settings (C) (<any character string consisting of up to 60 half-size (or 30 full-size) characters>) ; ce nt e @ SYS-TITLE (*** SYSTEM & PARAMETER ***) ; @ CMT-TITLE (*** SYMBOL & COMMENT ***) ; @ LAD-TITLE (*** LADDER DIAGRAM ***) ; @ STEP-TITLE (*** STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM ***) ; @ IO-TITLE (*** I/O MODULE DATA ***) ; @ MSG-TITLE (*** MESSAGE DATA ***) ; @ TIT-TITLE (*** TITLE DATA ***) ; @ CRS-TITLE (*** CROSS-REFERENCE ***) ; @ BIT-TITLE (*** BIT ADDRESS MAP ***) ; om I-PRTOUT. JPN. I-PRTOUT. ENG. Point of change r.c Name of file to be edited Notes 1 These point of changes are in the file, I_PRTOUT. ENG. 2 One–byte katakana characters cannot be used. nc (8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information This item can specify characters to be output as guidance information to be output during cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as guidance information. Name of file to be edited GUIDE= Settings Any character string consisting of up to 19 bytes (9) Setting the cross-reference list output information This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference information. If both step and net numbers are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as cross-reference information. w w w .c CROSSINF.DAT Point of change 188 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Name of file to be edited NET-INF= STEP-INF= Settings When only the net number is output: NET-INT=1 STEP-INF=0 When only the step number is output: NET-INT=0 STEP-INF=1 When the net and step numbers are output in the stated sequence: NET-INT=1 STEP-INF=2 When the step and net numbers are output in the stated sequence: NET-INT=2 STEP-INF=1 r.c om CROSSINF.DAT Point of change ce nt e (10)Specifying the cross-reference list output format This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid. Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT Point of change FORM= Settings Character string+‘%s’ nc Note Only letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’. .c (11) Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid. Name of file to be edited w w w CROSSINF.DAT Point of change READ= WRITE= Settings Character string consisting of up to 13 bytes. READ=-| |- -| / |: WRITE=-( )- -( / )- : (12)Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid. Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT 189 Point of change NL= Settings Decimal number 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Note In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus 1 are inserted between addresses. (If 0 is specified as the linefeed count, no space line is inserted between addresses.) Name of file to be edited FF= Settings ‘0’=the page is not advanced ‘1’=the page is advanced w w w .c nc ce nt e r.c CROSSINF.DAT Point of change om (13)Specifying the cross-reference list page break This item can specify a page break between address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid. 190 3.c * * * * (The name is changed from ’1:10 inch/ASCII’ to ’1:NEC 10’.DMP #END #10-G=10 inch/graphic LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=10 WIDTH=10 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=14 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=0 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=4 C FILE=PR201 10.DMP #END #15-G=15 inch Changing the spacing between the LADDER nets (The net spacing for the LADDER diagram is widened.INF O FILE=PRTDAT. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Environment settings for diagram printout .c * w w When ’3’ is selected as the printout paper * * * * * om Changing the upper margin r.DMP #END #15-A=15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=15 WIDTH=15 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=16 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=1 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=5 C FILE=PR15 A.example 1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.INF O FILE=PRTDAT. 191 .INF O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP #END * #15-G=15 inch ce nt e When ’1’ is selected as the printout paper Changing the types of printout paper nc * #PAPER=10-G #10-A=10 inch/ASCII LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=10 WIDTH=10 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=14 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=0 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=4 C FILE=PR10 A.INF O FILE=PRTDAT.) Note An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified. ) Changing the type of printer (The printer is changed to EPSON VP1000 and the paper is changed to 10-inch forms.) w .INF O FILE=PRTDAT.INF O FILE=PRTDAT.) #PAPER=10-G #10-A=NEC 10 LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=10 WIDTH=10 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=14 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=0 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=5 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=4 C FILE=PR10 A.DMP #END #10-G=EPSON 10 LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=10 WIDTH=10 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=14 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=0 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=4 C FILE=ESCP10 A.) Changing the types of printout paper (The name is changed from ’2:10inch/graphic’ to ’2:EPSON 10’.DAT) * When ’2’ is selected as the printout paper * * * * (The upper margin is set to 5 characters.DMP #END #15-A=15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL=11 LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=15 WIDTH=15 PITCHL=15/120 PITCH=20/120 LINESL=83 LINES=55 RATIOL=2/3 RATIO=2/3 GRAMODL=16 GRAMOD=16 ANKMODL=1 ANKMOD=1 LEFTMGL=0 LEFTWG=0 TOPMGL=0 TOPMG=0 LCNTL=4 C FILE=PR15 A. (H)(1B)(C)(L000). (H)(1B)(C)(J0014). (H)(1B)(C)(H). (H)(OC). (H)(1B)(C)(T15). (H)(1B)(C)(L005). (H)(18). (H)(1B)(C)(/078). : : : : : : w w w . (H)(1B)(C)(H).OA). (H)(1B)(C)(Q). 192 .3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 : : : : : PR201H3 CNTINF { CRLF FORMF CPI CANCEL LDRCPI * LPI * LDRLPI * LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET } (H)(OD.INF) : PR201H3 CNTINF { CRLF FORMF CANCEL CPI LDRCPI LPI LDRLPI LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET } (H)(OD. (H)(1B)(C)(/078). (H)(1B)(C)(K). (H)(18). (H)(1B)(C)(T20). : : : ce nt e : r.) (Line spacing is set to 25. (H)(1B)(C)(Q).) : : : nc : om Environment settings for diagram printout . (H)(OC). (H)(1B)(C)(H). (H)(1B)(C)(T15).c : : : Setting the spacing between lines Setting the left margin (Left margin is set to 5 characters. (H)(1B)(C)(K).OA). (H)(1B)(C)(H).c : Note An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified. (H)(1B)(C)(J0014). (H)(1B)(C)(T25).example 2 (settings in file PR201 10. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 : GUIDE=STEP No.: WRITE=-(). NET-INF=2 STEP-INF=1 FROM=S%s/N%s READ=-I I-!-I/I.c : S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010 S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017 S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035 : S00002/N00001 193 .0 w w w . Address X0.0 Symbol Comment : S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017 S00088/N00020 S00094/N0002 X0.3.DAT file [C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE] *** Cross reference *** ce nt e PAGE 1 STEP NO.DAT file) D Sample setting of the CROSSINF. r./NET No.c D Sample cross reference output om Environment settings for diagram output ./NET No.-(/).example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.1 : S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017 S00077/N00029 MULTIPLE COIL USED Y0.0 nc : S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098 R0.: NL=1 FF=0 . the floppy disk drive is drive A.DAT file) D Sample setting of the CROSSINF.c D Sample cross reference output om Environment settings for diagram output . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 : GUIDE=step number NET-INF=0 STEP-INF=1 FROM=S%s READ=read WRITE=write NL=0 FF=0 . (1) Changing the printer specification to NEC PR201 To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer.0 Read : S00009 S00012 S00014 S00015 S00022 S00024 S00033 S00045 S00047 S00074 S00079 Write: S00002 3. Example:C: \ CD FLADDER Enter C: \ FLADDER>COPY A: \ APPENDIX \ AMROFTRP.0 Read : S00045 S00049 S00053 S00082 S00088 S00094 X0.c nc X0.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of Volume 1.example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.0 Write: S00045 S00128 S00256 R0. change the setting file by means of the procedure described below. (In the following example. and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.3.) [Operation] 1) Copy the AMROFTRP.PR C: 194 Enter . the default printer is set to EPSON VP1000.3.DAT file ce nt e [C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE] *** Cross reference *** PAGE 1 Step number Address Symbol Comment w . installed drive is under the C: \ FLADDER directory.6 w w Changing the Printer Specification Upon the completion of installation.5 of system floppy disk to the install directory. r.5.1 Read : S00050 S00054 S00059 S00065 S00077 MULTIPLE COIL USED Y0. 4 Enter Compile Source program Object file Transferred to the ROM writer and PMC D Condensed mode A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. Please set the communication mode from DOS prompt before start by the following command. Compilation can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and condensed mode.3. the size of the created object file is smaller than that created in normal mode.5 (4). see Section 3.c Compilation During compilation. condensed mode has the advantages listed below. an edited source program is translated into an object file executable by the PMC.2 w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Delete the AMROPTRP.3.N. 195 .DAT Enter om Note To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer.8. Uncompiled programs cannot use online function and cannot be transferred to the RAM for the PMC. nc 3.PR file to AMROPTRP.PR with AMROFTRP.ESC. perform steps 1) through 3).c (2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printer For details.DAT Enter 3) Change the name of the AMROFTRP.5.5.DAT file from install directory. (Example) When connected to a serial port COM1. ce nt e Note FANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with RS-232-C cable. When a ladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode. replacing AMROFTRP. r.PR AMROPTRP. As a result.DAT. Example:C: \ FLADDER>RENAME AMROFTRP. Example:C: \ FLADDER>DEL AMROPTRP. C:/>MODE COM1:4800. subdivided into subprograms. condensed mode has the restrictions described below. In this case. comments. subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogram numbers. is converted to a single ROM file. On the other hand.3. symbols. and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built–in editing function. the source program. w w w Overlap (A C language program map change is required. Ladder Ladder ROM format file nc C language C language . Within the ROM file.c 2) A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode cannot be compared with a ROM format file generated by compilation in normal mode. D Changing the order of subprograms When a program is compiled. the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between the ladder area and C language area. 4) A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.) 196 . Normal mode Condensed mode Ladder Ladder C language ↑ C language om Object file ce nt e r. 1) Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when instructions. 3) Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the PMC is reduced. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 1) A larger C language area can be allocated.c 2) Time required for compilation is reduced. 1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens (2) Compile (a) Normal mode [Operation] 1) Select F1 [EXEC]. 2) The compile screen appears. (b) Condense mode [Operation] 1) Select F8 [CONDNS]. 2) Compile processing is performed in normal mode.3.1 Start and Terminate (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.3.3.c nc D General Flow of Operation for compiling [COMPIL] F3 Specify input program w [ EXEC ] [CONDNS] F1 w w Offline menu F8 Offline menu Fig.5.5.4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. PMC–RB4 ] : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE Source program name Output to ROM format file SYMBOL & COMMENT [F6] YES NET COMMENT [F7] POINTERS ONLY ce nt e r.4.5.c V <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ om Compile 1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS 10 END Fig.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen . 197 . those errors can be easily identified by viewing the relevant file with the text editor or by printing out the file. the following files are output to the C:¥DATA directory: Execution result file SAMPLE.#LA Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction.4.#LA in each P1.3. (See Section 3. LEVEL2. P2. the results of compile processing are output to a text–format file. regardless of whether an error or warning has been output.c C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE ##### PASSI ##### Output the compile result in two passes.#LA subprogram.) Example: When the program shown below is compiled.c nc PASS1: Convert to object PASS2: Syntax check If many errors have occurred.3.9.5. The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function. The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3 [ERROR] on the compile screen. ##### PASS2 ##### Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 2) Compile processing is performed in condense mode. MESSAGE SYMBOL LEVEL1.4.1 (c) Compile Result Compile PMC–RB4 Source program name w w . (3) Displaying the results of compile processing Pressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processing displays a memory map for the object file.5.3.ERR Map file SAMPLE. as described below.#LA There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.5. Moreover. om ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Error count =00002 Warning count =00000 ce nt e Compile completed r.MAP <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE Compile Normal End w Compile completed 1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 error count=000000 5 warning count=000000 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS Fig. (00111net) Net No.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen 198 10 END . However.the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MDI (7bytes or more symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them never output to object file.3. D “POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting) To edit the ladder program by CNC on–line editor and decompile the data select this setting. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (4) DOS command You can call MS–DOS shell by pushing F9 [DOS] key.) Compile Options nc ce nt e (1) F6 [SYMBOL] Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data to ROM format file. you can choose whether ‘Net comment pointer’ (Note1) is output to object file or not.7 Program option set–up. D “YES”: (Default setting) The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDI(6bytes or less symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them are output to object file. (Refer to 3.c (2) F7 [NETCMT] If Net comment is used in ladder program.2 r. In this case.5. However. key in the command as bellow at MS–DOS command line.c These options’ initial value can be changed at the Program option set–up. They can be displayed on CRT/MDI. D “NO” : Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to object file. 2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen. 199 .4. Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI. w w w . ladder size in the object file is saved. ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ is output to object file.5. If you want to terminate this. A : \>EXIT 1) Select [END] or press the Esc om (5) Termination [Operation] key. decompile the object file makes its net comment data information lost. However. D “NO” : No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file. 3. 5. Enter password (R) 3) Enter a password. RW or R After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected. If it is unnecessary to set a password. This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net comment date at decompiling the object file that is edited on CNC on–line editor.c Do you enter password? (Y/N) To set a password. D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. Password (R/W) Password to allow display and editing on the CNC. Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. (If a lowercase letter is entered. press N → Go to 10).5. This function requires to be set the program option. w w w . Compiled object file does not include any net comment characters.c 3. → If password RW go to 6). The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited. press Y → If password RW & R or R go to 2). it is assumed to be uppercase. D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals.7 Setting program options. (Refer to 3. Password Set Function It enables a password to be added during compilation. Only ‘Net comment pointer’( = information of net comment position. Type Use Password (R) Password to allow display on the CNC. nc (2) Password setting (compile) 1) When no password → Go to 10). OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om Note Net comment has its own character information only in a source program on the personal computer.3.4.3 ce nt e (1) Password types There are two password types. 2) The password (R) set screen appears. you will be prompted to specify whether to use a password. When password RW & R.) r.) 200 .) can be output to object file as an functional instruction “NOP”. r. and @). → If password=RW&R go to 6). D If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is D When Esc om specified. an attempt to specify a password is discontinued. #. it is accepted. and @). it is assumed to be uppercase. D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. You are allowed to retry entering twice. 4) The password configuration screen appears. to ensure that your password was entered correctly. → Go to 10). D An entered password is not displayed on the screen. Enter password (R/W) 7) Enter a password (R/W). an attempt to specify a password is discontinued. kana. w w w . If one such character string is entered as a password. an error message is displayed. D When they do not match.c → Go to 1). is pressed. In such a case. and special characters (such as *. the message ”Password mismatch” is displayed. an error message is displayed. If one such character string is entered as a password. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 D It is impossible to use space. use another character string. (If a lowercase letter is entered. 6) The password (R/W) set screen appears.3. use of a password is not specified. D Some character strings are unusable. use another character string. Verification (R) ce nt e 5) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before. If password=R go to 10). use of a password is not specified. kanji.c nc → Go to 1). In such a case. D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. #. D If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is specified. → Go to 10).) D It is impossible to use space. kana. 201 . D When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before. kanji. and special characters (such as *. If password=R is specified. D An entered password is not displayed on the screen. D When Esc is pressed. D Some character strings are unusable. Data in the object file cannot be edited or printed out. Decompilation nc Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object file data. → Go to 1). → Go to 1). the message ”Password mismatch” is displayed. (See Section 3. it is necessary to enter a password. D When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before.c Object file 202 . the attempt to specify a password is rejected. 3. the attempt to specify a password is rejected.5. ce nt e 10)Compilation begins.4. it is accepted. to ensure that your password was entered correctly.5. Such data must be decompiled before it can be edited or printed out. is pressed.c D When om 9) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before. Verification (R/W) Esc r.) w w w . You are allowed to retry entering twice. 8) The password confirmation screen appears. D When they do not match.5 During decompilation.3. Decompile Source program Note To decompile a password–protected object file. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 D When Esc is pressed. an object file is translated into a source program that can be edited or printed out. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.5.5. the error file can be viewed or printed using a text editor.ERR and map file SAMPLE.c V <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ om Operation 1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.5.5.1 (1) Start [Operation] 1) Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu. 2) The decompile screen appears.1 (a) Decompile Menu Screen nc (2) Decompiling [Operation] 1) Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.9).c (3) Decompiling Upon the completion of decompiling. pressing the F2 [MAP] key can display the memory map of the object file.5. Decompile PMC–RB4 Source program name ] : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE Output to Source Program SYMBOL & COMMENT Merge [F4] YES Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective) ce nt e r. If many errors have occurred.MAP are output to directory C: \ DATA. w w w . The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3 [ERROR] key on the decompile screen. The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utility function (see Section 3. 203 .3. regardless of whether an error or warning has occurred. 2) Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed. (Example) When the program shown below is decompiled : Result file SAMPLE.3. 5. Decompile PMC–RB4 Source program name V <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE Output to source program SYMBOL & COMMENT Merge [F4] YES Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective) w w w .c om Decompile completed 3 ERROR 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with the Symbol/Commnet in source program by specifying the undermentioned function–key.5.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Decompile PMC–RB4 Source program name <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE Decompile normal end error count=000000 warning count=000000 1 EXEC 2 MAP r.1 (b) Decompile end Screen ce nt e (4) Termination [Operation] 1) Select [END].c nc Decompile Option 1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 Fig.5. the existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of object file. 3.2 (1) Merge In case the existent file is specified for output source program when decompiling.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen 204 9 10 END .3.5.5.3. 2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen. 1) “SOURCE DATA” The symbol definition in source program is effective. As for the other data except symbol/comment. 205 .c (b) F5 [SYMBOL] F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when ”YES” is specified for F4[MERGE]. object file is effective. w w w . This specification decides which symbol definition in either source program or object file is effective when they are in conflict. 2) “MEMORY CARD DATA” : (Default setting) The symbol definition in object file is effective. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om (a) F4 [MERGE] This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by “NO” or “YES”. when they are in conflict. 2) “YES” : (Default setting) The symbol/commnet in source program is merged with that in object file.c nc ce nt e r. F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol definition is effective. Just after this specification.3. There is no display of “F5[SYNBOL]” in this condition. 1) ”NO” : The existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of object file. either in source program or in object file. 0 R1.0 Y2.3 Y4. Source program nc XXXXXX BBBBBBBB YYYYYY BBBBBBBBBBBBBB . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR].Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY (ii) The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD DATA”. and its result.0 Y2.7 206 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY .0 R1.Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) om .7 RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) ce nt e .3. Object file COIL-COMMENT(30byte) X0.4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY XXXXXX YYYYYY Source program AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY (i) The result of ”MERGE = NO” Source program X0.c X0. Source program AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB w w w X0.0 Y2.3 R1. program”.3 Y4.4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY (iii)The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA”.c X0.4 XXXXXX YYYYYY COIL-COMMENT(30byte) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY r. ce nt e 2) When the valid password is entered.3 To decompile a password-protected file. an error message is displayed.5. ”password (R/W)” is displayed.5. If the newly entered password is incorrect. it is necessary to enter a password. 207 is pressed.c Note If an R/W password has been set up.c nc rejected. Password Set password type Password type to be entered Both password (R) and (R/W) Password (R/W) Password (R/W) Password (R/W) Password (R) Password (R) Enter password (R) om 1) After discompilation [EXEC] is selected. (You are allowed to retry entering twice. r. the request to start discompilation is . and processing discontinues. discompilation begins. the following password entry screen appears.) When Esc w w w .3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. For details.3.#SS Subprogram P2 (Step Sequence) nc SPE (SUB 72) P003 . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. they are split into units of subprograms and output to different files.6.#LA Ladder 2nd level END2 (SUB 2) r.#LA Subprogram P1 (Ladder) SPE (SUB 72) SP (SUB 71) P002 P2. 208 .#LA Ladder 3rd level END3 (SUB 48) SP (SUB 71) P001 ce nt e P1. END (SUB 64) w w The instruction is automatically added when the program is compiled.2. see Section 2.c LEVEL3.5.#LA Subprogram P3 (Ladder) w SPE (SUB 72) The END instruction is not in the source program.c SP (SUB 71) P3.#LA om Ladder 1st level END1 (SUB 1) LEVEL2.4 When the results of decompilation are output to a source program. Outputting to Split Files Object file Source program LEVEL1.5. respectively. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.) 2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu. Input/Output (1) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232–C interface. om (3) Backup and restore source program and.6.3.DAT (effective data section only) 209 .5.1 w w w . Ports are set according to the values in the following data files.6 There are three types of input/output operations. (2) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette Adapter or Handy File. and connect them via an RS-232-C cable.c 3.DAT These files are in text format. [Operation] 1) Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit. 3) The input/output menu appears. (See Appendix H.c nc ce nt e (2) Contents of the FLIO_AT. as described below.5. r. So. I/O Port Setting (1) FLIO_AT. 2 Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Device Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each MODE command. N. 8. 2 =COM1 : 48. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. N. N. 8.3. 8.c om PMC-WRITER 210 . 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 DATA-BLOCK=IO-PORT-SET =COM1 : 48. N. 8.c nc ce nt e r. N. 8. N. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. 2 FA-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M (TT) PMC-M (AXIS) PMC-MMC PMC-MMC (AXIS) PMC-N PMC-P PMC-QA PMC-M (I/O) PMC-M (I/O. N. 8. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. 8. Only the first parameter (port number) and second parameter (baud rate) can be changed. N. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. N. 8. 8. 8. 8. N. N. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. N. 8. 8. N. 2 =COM1 : 96. 2 =COM1 : 96. 2 =COM1 : 96. w w w . 8. N. 8. 2 =COM1 : 48. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. 8. N. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. 8. N. N. 8. N. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. 2 =COM1 : 96. TT) PMC-M (I/O. 2 =COM1 : 48. N. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. 8. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. 8. N. 2 =COM1 : 48. AXIS) PMC-N (I/O) PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RA1 PMC-RA2 PMC-RB2 PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ) PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ) =COM1 : 48. 2 =COM1 : 96. N. 2 =COM1 : 96. 2 =COM1 : 96. 8. and [EXEC] in this order. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.6.3. LADDER and ALL have the following meanings: LADDER Sequence program only ALL Sequence program and language data (C language) Specify either data type in step 6) of the operation described below: [Operation] 1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. [I/O]. w w w . the indication “EXECUTING” blinks. [I/O]. During operation. 2) Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display the source program name. When uploading or comparison is executed from PMC. and [EXEC] in this order.5. Transfer to and from PMC Ladder Editing Package CNC 9600/4800bps Download 9600/4800bps Upload om PMC (I/O) screen PMC (I/O) screen 9600/4800bps Comparison r.c PMC (I/O) screen Baud rate setting ce nt e (1) Download [Operation] 1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. 6) Downloading is executed. 7) When downloading terminates normally. 211 . 2) Select F1 : [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen to display the source program name. * 3) Press the System key of the CNC.2 Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C. [HOST]. * 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC]. one of two data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. * 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC].c nc 5) Press the Enter key. (2) Upload Language data (C language) other than Ladder programs can be used. * 3) Press the System key of the CNC. the indication “NORMAL END” is output. [HOST]. * 3) Press the System key of the CNC. and output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer. the indication “EXECUTING” blinks. 7) When comparison terminates normally. the indication “EXECUTING” blinks. ce nt e 6) Comparison is executed. The PMC program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory card in the memory card interface in the CNC. 2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.5. By reversing the procedure.6. and [EXEC] in this order.3. 3. (1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC [Operation] 1) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer. 2) F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program. 212 .During operation. and select [I/O] (input/output) from it. (4) Termination [Operation] 1) Select [END]. programs can be transferred from the CNC RAM to the memory card. During operation. r. 4) Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu. 8) When uploading terminates normally.c * 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC]. 5) Press the Enter key. 2) Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen to display the source program name. 3) Return to the main menu. [HOST]. the indication “NORMAL END” is output. [I/O]. w w w Memory Card Interface in the Personal Computer and Memory Card A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a memory card format file. . an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation on the CNC. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 5) Press the Enter key. om (3) Comparison [Operation] 1) Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.3 . 7) Uploading is executed. the indication “NORMAL END” is output. 6) Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.c nc Note In the operations above. c nc F10 KEY : END 1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.5. I/O (MEMORY CARD) PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] F1 KEY : WRITE (PROGRAMMER → Memory Card) F2 KEY : READ (PROGRAMMER ← Memory Card) w w w . Specify the following items for execution. D Name of the memory card file Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the CNC) to be created by conversion.c 1 FAWRT 2 PMCWRT 3 PMC Fig.6.5. D Name of the source program Display the source program name. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 I/O PMC–RB3 FA WRITER PMC WRITER PMC Handy File Memory Card BACKUP ROM format file END om F1 KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : F4 KEY : F5 KEY : F6 KEY : F9 KEY : F10 KEY : [C: ¥FLADDER¥] 4 FDCAS 5 M–CARD 6 BACKUP 7 8 9 ROMFIL 10 END r.3.3.3 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen 6) Convert the file from source program to memory card format. 213 .3 (a) Input/Output Menu ce nt e 5) Select [WRITE] (write (programmer → memory card)).3.6. and the drive where the memory card is inserted. READ.5.c 1 EXEC om Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE. Sequence programs are read from the memory card file created in step 5).c PMC I/O PROGRAM EXEC CANCEL WRITE READ COMPAR D Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on time Each CNC can read the sequence program from the memory card by using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on time. FUNCTION. nc PMC I/O screen CHANNEL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA KIND FILE NO.#BF (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive) Fig. ( #NAME ) MONIT STOP = = = = = 1 M–CARD READ LADDER w w w . and the desired filename or file number at DEVICE. ce nt e 7) The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card output in step 6) into the memory card interface in the CNC and read programs on the memory card. 214 .3. respectively.3 (c) Input/Output (to MCARD) Screen The following operations are performed on the CNC side. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 I/O (TO MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] WRITE (Programmer → Memory card) Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END r.6. on the PMC I/O screen. then press soft key [EXEC]. Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation. D Using the I/O function of the PMC Specify M–CARD.3. and FILE NO. When the memory card is inserted in a memory card interface in the personal computer. respectively. 3.5. (See Fig. and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE.c = = = = = ce nt e CHANNEL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA KIND FILE NO. D Name of the source program Display the source program name. Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.6. 3.) Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 1) from memory card format to source program format by specifying the following items and running the utility. WRITE.3 (b). LADDER.3 (a). PMC I/O screen PMC I/O PROGRAM 1 M–CARD WRITE LADDER r.5.c w w w 5) 6) WRITE READ COMPAR The following operations are performed on the personal computer side. ( #NAME ) MONIT STOP EXEC . D Name of the memory card file Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory card. (See Fig. FUNCTION.6. nc 2) 3) 4) CANCEL 215 .) Select [READ] (read (programmer ← memory card)). DATA KIND.3. Sequence programs are output to the memory. the PMC programs on the memory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files. using a memory card interface in the CNC. on the PMC I/O screen. and FILE NO. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om (2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer PMC programs are written to a memory card. Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu. then press soft key [EXEC]. Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu. and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted. [Operation] 1) Specify M–CARD. This operation can be reversed.#BF (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END r.4 Handy File+3. w I/O (FDCAS) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] F1 KEY : WRITE(Programmer → Handy File) w F2 KEY : READ (Programmer ← Handy File) w F10 KEY : END 1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fig.3.3. (See Fig.5. 3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.6.5.5.5.) 4) Select [WRITE] (WRITE (Programmer → Handy File)).6.6. and the resultant file will become able to be edited on the personal computer.c nc (1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC [Operation] 1) Compile a source program. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 I/O (FROM MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] READ (Programmer ← Memory card) Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE. 2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu. If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output to a 3.3.c 1 EXEC : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE om Source program name Fig.6.5” floppy disk (DOS format).5” Floppy Disk (MS–DOS Format) ce nt e 7) Discompile the object file after conversion.3 (d) Input/Output (from MCARD) Screen 3.4 (a).4 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen 216 10 END . 3. . the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a Handy File interface connected to the CNC. and the 3. and output the PMC program to a 3. PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] WRITE (Programmer → Handy File) Source program name om I/O (TO FDCAS) : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE ce nt e r.6.5” floppy disk drive where the floppy disk is inserted.5.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 5) Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying the following items and running the utility.5.5” floppy disk (Handy File format) generated in step 1) to source program by specifying the following items and running the utility.) 5) Convert the PMC program on a 3. 3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.6. and the 3. 3. 217 .4 (a).5” floppy disk (DOS format). and insert the 3. w w w . 2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main unit. 4) Select [READ] (READ (Programmer ← Handy File)).4 (b) Input/Output (to FDCAS) Screen nc The following operations are performed on the CNC side.5” disk drive to which the file is output.c Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE. 5” floppy disk cannot be used. The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.3. 6) Connect the CNC and Handy File. D Name of the source program Display the source program. (See Fig. D Name of the Handy File format file Specify the program name output in step 1).c (2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer [Operation] 1) Connect the CNC and Handy File.#SF (Specify the floppy disk drive) 1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.5” floppy disk generated in step 4) into the Handy File. D Name of the source program Display the source program. D Name of the Handy File format file Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy File) to be generated by conversion. 5 Backup of User Program ce nt e 6) Decompile the source program file after conversion. PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] F1 KEY : BACKUP F2 KEY : RESTORE F10 KEY : END w w w . and press [EXEC].5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 I/O (FROM FDCAS) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] READ (Programmer ← Handy File) Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE.c nc I/O (BACKUP) 1 BACKUF 2 RESTOP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. which the system uses.4 (c) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen 3.3. 218 .3. 3) Enter a backup program name. Please use this function when you back up the source program under editing or under debugging.#SF (Specify the floppy disk drive) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END r. 2) Select F1 : [BACKUP] from the backup menu.5. This backup function can back up the source program.6.6. to another source program and can restore the backup source program.3. and the resultant file will become able to be edited on the personal computer.5 (a) Backup Menu Screen (1) Backup [Operation] 1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.5.6.c 1 EXEC : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE om Source program name Fig. 3.3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 I/O (BACKUP) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] BACKUP (SOURCE PROGRAM → BACKUP PROGRAM) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END r. 3) Enter a backup program name. ce nt e (2) Restoring [Operation] 1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu. and press [EXEC]. 219 .3.5. the “NORMAL END” message is displayed.c BACKUP PROGRAM NAME 1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. the “NORMAL END” message is displayed.6.5.c 1 EXEC : om BACKUP PROGRAM NAME Fig.6. 2) Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu. I/O (RESIORE) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] nc RESTORE (SOURCE PROGRAM ← BACKUP PROGRAM) : w w w .5 (c) Restoring Screen 4) When restoring terminates normaly.5 (b) Backup Screen 4) When backup terminates normaly. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. 5) When press [EXEC]. [Operation] or 1) Using the key. The “I/O (MCARD→ROM FILE)” screen is displayed. 2) On the setting screen for each function. 3) Select F1:[WRITE]. The “I/O(ROM format file)” screen (Fig.6(a) This function enables the setting of options for each function.5.5.6(a)) is displayed. I/O (ROM format file) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥] F1 KEY : WRITE (Memory Card → ROM format file) F2 KEY : READ (Memory Card ← ROM format file) w 3.In the case of link processing.3. a. 2) Select F9:[ROMFIL] from the input/output menu.5. select an item by positioning the cursor with the or key.3.c om (1) Operation 1) Select [I/O] from the off–line menu. The input/output menu screen is displayed.In the case of using ROM format file which is created by FAPT LADDER.6 Converting ROM Format File It is possible to convert between a ROM format file and a memory card format file.7 w . 220 or key. position the cursor to the function for which options are to be set.6. Select F2:[READ]. b. ROM format file conversion function can be used at the following cases. 4) Input a ROM format file name and a memory card file name. ce nt e r.6.6.c nc F10 KEY : END w Setting Program Options 1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10END Fig.3. it is possible to convert between a ROM format file and a memory card file.5. The “I/O (ROM FILE→MCARD)” screen is displayed. Specified data is stored for each source program. then change the setting with the . (4) Password This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compile time. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Program option set–up [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ] 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END r.3.c 1 EDIT om Compile Decompile Fig.c (3) Net comment This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object file. when set. These options.5. w w w . [RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box.5.4. For details of each option. nc (2) Symbol This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to an object file. see Section 3. [R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box. Compile (1) Condense This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for compile processing.5.7.3. are used as the initial values of the compile options for the off–line function.) [RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the password (R) setting dialog box. or are used for compile processing performed with the on–line functions.7 3. 221 . [NO] : Does not display the dialog box.1 ce nt e The user can set the compile function options as described below. (Password setting is disabled. [NO] : Does not merge symbol and comment data.3.7. or are used for the decompile processing performed with the on–line functions.5. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Program option set–up [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ] [Compile] 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O [OFF/ON] [NOT USE/USE] [NO/POINTERS] [NO/RW&R/RW/R] 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END r.5. These options.7.1 3. 222 . are used as the initial values of the off–line function decompile options. see Section 3.c nc (1) Symbol merge This option specifies whether to merge source program data and object file symbol/comment data at decompile time. when set.5. [SOURCE] : Gives priority to the source data when duplicate addresses exist in the source program and the symbol data of the object file. For details of each option. Decompile w w w .2 ce nt e The user can set the decompile function options as described below.3.5. [MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data when duplicate addresses exist in the source program and the symbol data of the object file.c 1 EDIT : : : : om condense symbol/comment net comment password Fig. [Operation] 1) Using the text editor. 4) Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to be modified.3 w w w . Output net comment data to the object file.7.7.7.3. the initial value of each option can be modified by means of the procedure described below.5.c nc Note A section having a line beginning with a semicolon (. Example: #32.(RA3) for PMC–RA3 #41.) contains legend data.CNF) When a new program is to be created. a line starting with *). Performs compile processing in condense mode. 3) Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initial value modification (that is.c 1 EDIT END : [NO/SOURCE/MEMORY_CARD] om symbol merge Fig.3. open the OPTION.(RB4_STEP) for PMC–RB4 (STEP SEQ) ce nt e 3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Program option set–up [C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ] [Decompile] 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 r. Table 3.5. 2) Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial value modification (that is. . Dose not output net comment data to the object file. Any attempt to modify such a section is ignored.3 Subsection *COMPILE Option condense Setting and function 0: 1: symbol (Symbol/ comment) 0: 1: netcmt 0: (Net comment) 1: 223 Performs compile processing in normal mode.CNF file under the directory where this system is installed. a line starting with #).5. Output symbol/comment data to the object file.2 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION. Dose not output symbol/comment data to the object file. Otherwise. Mnemonic Editing 3.5.1 (a) Mnemonic Menu Screen 3) Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).1 A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor. 3.5.3.5.1(b)).1 (a)).5. Sets a password (R/W) and password (R). 224 . 2) The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig.8. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Subsection Option Setting and function password 0: 1: 2: 3: *DECOMPILE symbol–merge 0: 1: Dose not perform merge processing.8 MNEMONIC EDIT PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] [C: ¥FLADDER¥ ] SOURCE PROGRAM → MNEMONIC FILE MNEMONIC FILE ← SOURCE PROGRAM EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE END w w w . Sets a password (R). [Operation] 1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu. r.8. 3.c F1 KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : F10 KEY : 1 MNECNV 2 SRCCNV 3 BATCH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig.5.8. Sets a password (R/W). 4) The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. Preforms merge processing with priority given to source program data.c Note Never attempt to modify the values of options that are not listed in the above table.3. Preforms merge processing with priority given to object file data. nc Conversion of a Source Program to a Mnemonic File ce nt e 3. the system may malfunction. om 2: Dose not set a password.8. 3. FULL_OPTIONS w w w . Japanese language Comment data. D Data conversion selection Specify data files subject to conversion. Data including address symbols and comments. operand sections. D Mnemonic file name Specify the name of the mnemonic file to which a source program is converted. All data files can be specified or specific data files can be selected.c FOR_P-G and 225 Comment data. 4 : LADDER .1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen nc ce nt e 5) Specify the following items: D Source program name Display the name of the source program to be converted. . 5 : I/O MODULE .c 1 EXEC SOURCE PROGRAM NAME MNEMONIC FILE NAME CONVERT DATA KIND SELECTION 0 : ALL 1 : SYSTEM PARAMETER 2 : TITLE 3 : SYMBOL & COMMENT MODE Selected Options /ERC FLMNE. Up to 40 characters can be specified. using the keys. The source program that is specified in program selection as initial menu.5. is comment (Note) converted. 6 : MESSAGE ) ) ) ) : FOR _P–G 7 8 9 10 END r.8. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 SOURCE → MNEMONIC PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] [C: ¥FLADDER¥ ] 2 3 4 5 6 : : : . Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language format (Note 2). Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2). Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language format (Note 2). D Mode (setting item selection) Specify setting items. which may include kanji characters.ERR /OUT V om 1) 2) 3) ( ( ( ( 4) Fig. and function instruction names treated as comments is converted. Select items from the table below. Data including all instruction sections.3. is converted. which may include kanji characters. P-G output format data is converted. and comment sections is converted. SP. 2) The mnemonic menu screen appears. JMPC. 3.) Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language format (Note 2). 2 Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input mode screen during message editing. r. 3) Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program). 4) The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 LABEL/ SUB-PROGRAM Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction (JMPB.3.5. (The function instruction section used in the sub-program does not agree with the other setting.5.8. [Operation] 1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.3.2 MNEMONIC → SOURCE PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ] [C: ¥FLADDER¥ ] : : 1) MNEMONIC FILE NAME 2) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME w w w . or another instruction) used in a sub-program is highlighted. Enter is pressed after conversion.2 Source Program Conversion Screen 226 .2). 6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.8.c om Notes 1 The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected on an English mode system. CALL.c nc Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted to a source program. The step number of the converted mnemonic data does not agree with other setting. 7) Source program is converted to a mnemonic file. ce nt e 8) An error message is displayed if The mnemonic conversion screen appears when Space is pressed after conversion. 1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END Fig. 3.5.8. (2) Linefeed code Control character LF (0AH) is defined as a linefeed code.3. 6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification. 227 . conversion to ”%@2-C” type code is performed. This means that.c pressed after conversion. as part of conversion to a mnemonic file. ce nt e (1) Identification code The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification codes that each begin with %. D Source program name Display the name of the source program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.8. however. Space If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted to a source program. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 5) Specify the following items: D Mnemonic file name Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Unit-format data w w w . and “%@2-C” correspond to source format types as follows: %@2 : FORMAT-A/B %@2-C: FORMAT-C Ladder Editing Package uses FORMAT-C only. om 8) An error message is displayed if The source program conversion screen appears when 3.c Parameter Title Symbol & comment Ladder Message I/O module PMC model R series/PA3/QC/NB/NB2 %@0 %@1 %@2 or %@2-C (Note 1) %@3 %@4 %@5 Note “%@2”. 7) Mnemonic file is converted to a source program. Up to 40 characters can be specified. the mnemonic file must be in the following format.3 Mnemonic File Format is r. Control character CR (0DH) is ignored. Enter is pressed after conversion. For conversion to a source program. both type codes (“%@2” and “%@2-C”) can be used. ID code Description %@A %@E %@0 to 5 % only Beginning of ALL-format data End of ALL-format data Beginning of unit-format data End of unit-format data nc The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.5. D A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder data. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 om (3) Reserved symbols 1) . D A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder data from a comment. Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe after address data with blank character or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter. a part of relay comment must be described by double single quotation marks. The first string between two single quotation marks after mark ”$1” is relay comment. D A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separate a channel number from I/O module data. ce nt e (a) Symbol and comment data 1) Description of address and symbol Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line. This special character is reserved for use in ladder data. 2) : This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data. | $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’ Coil comment w w w .0 UNIT–3–POWER Blank character or horizontal tabulation character Relay comment Blank character or horizontal tabulation character Mark of comment data line (only ’$1’) When relay comment is not used. r. a semicolon and a comment that follows it are not generated. Every dollar character in the sentence must be described as ”$$” in the mnemonic file. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number.c nc | R0200. 228 . Symbol Blank character or horizontal tabulation character Address 2) Description of relay comment and coil comment Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address defined in (1).c (4) Control character The dollar character ”$” is used as control character in the mnemonic file. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a channel number.3. And next string between two single quotation marks is coil comment. When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program. Characters that follow a semicolon are treated as a comment. 4 Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing) (a) Parameter Following example is for PMC-RC4.3. 5. (b) Ladder data 1) Description of net comment The net comment data is specified by ’(*’ and ’*)’ characters. Characters $P or $p 3. 229 Counter data type (Binary or BCD) Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used.c nc Sample Mnemonic Files (Single-format) Means 2. 7. NO: Not used) PMC model (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4 (STEPSEQ)) Start address of language program link control statement data (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal)) Percentage of language program execution time (1% to 99%) Ladder execution time (Always 100%) . 6.8. Characters Means Start of net comment *) Terminater of net comment r.5. 4. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 | $1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’ om Note Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil comment string must be described as ”$” + ” ’ ” in the mnemonic file. see APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS 1) PMC-RC4 %@0↓ 2 BCD↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC – RC4↓ 5 000000 6 50↓ 7 100↓ %↓ [EOB] w w w . For other PMCs. 3.c (* ce nt e 2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing) Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described as ”$P” or ”$p” in the mnemonic file. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used).↓ 07 DATE OF PROGRAMING↓ 08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY↓ 09 ROM WRITTEN BY↓ 10 REMARKS↓ %↓ [EOB] om 3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓ (c) Symbols and comments (common to all models) %@2–C Symbol R0200.c %@1↓ 01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓ 02 MACHINE TOOL NAME↓ 03 CNC & PMC NAME↓ 04 PMC PROGRAM NO.↓ 05 EDITION NO.0 UNIT–3–POWER $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’ Display of symbol/comment % no Relay comment [EOB] w w w .1 UNIT–2–ACT $1 ’$’OIWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’ R0300.c nc Coil Comment Relay comment R0200. specify the KEY address.↓ 06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO. KEY image address.3. LED address. and LED image address as follows: (b) Title (common to all models) ce nt e r.0 Control code $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’ P0008 OPEN–FRONT $1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’ L0100 INITIALIZE $1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’ 230 . (SP1000 ) ”SUB PROGRAM NO.(RADRS00) ↓ .1” ↓ .4↓ OR Y80.(SUBPR1 ) ”SUB PROG.(DADRS04) ↓ 72 71 P2 R0.3. JMPB↓ no Comment . [LABEL L00001]↓ . SP .1↓ SUB 1↓ RD.c N00007: RD DEC 231 Coil comment . [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO. LBL ↓ .0 68 L100 N00003: RD SUB X0.0 ↓ 72 .01” ↓ .(LABEL1 ) ↓ . SPE ↓ .1 73 L100 N00004: SUB 69 L100 nc N00002: RD SUB N00005: SUB N00006: SUB WRT N00008: SUB N00009: SUB % ↓ w w w . SPE ↓ 64 .NOT X3.(XADRS2 ) ”JUMPC LABEL L001”↓ . SP ↓ . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 (d) Ladder (common to all models) 1) FOR_P-G %@3↓ N00001: SUB Symbol Relay comment . [LABEL L00001]↓ .(LABEL1 ) ↓ . END ↓ .0 D0 2↓ D0.6↓ WRT D300.(LABEL1 ) ↓ no Relay .(XADRS1 ) ”JUMPB LABEL L001”↓ .c 2) FULL_OPTIONS om %@3 ↓ RD X0. NO.01]↓ ce nt e 71 P1 r. JMPC↓ .0↓ SUB 40↓ 2↓ 8191 ↓ D300 ↓ SUB 2↓ %↓ [EOB] X0. [LABEL L00001]↓ comment . [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.1” ↓ > ↓ > ↓ ce nt e % ↓ om SP (e) Message nc %@4↓ A00. NO.<L100 > ↓ .<L100 > [LABEL L00001]↓ .01]↓ Coil comment Symbol XADRS1 .0 ↓ > ”SUB PROG. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM Address RD JMPB LABEL1 SP1000 RD JMPB LBL SPE ↓ SP RD DEC WRT SPE ↓ END ↓ SUBPR1 .<D0 2↓ D0.[LABEL L00001]↓ .<X0.0 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓ LABEL1 .c %@3↓ SUBPR1 .<P1 > ”SUB PROG.c %@5↓ X000 1 Y008 1 %↓ [EOB] 232 Relay comment r.1 2100022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON↓ A00. NO.<X0.1 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓ LABEL1 .0 DADR04 .<R0.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ON↓ %↓ [EOB] (f) I/O module 0 0 1 ID64A↓ 4 OD64B↓ w w w .01” .<L100 > ↓ .3.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE↓ A00.[LABEL L00001] ↓ XADRS2 .<P2 RADR00 . 2↓ WRT Y200.0↓ AND R1000.0↓ OR R120.200. *) RD R1001.2 ↓ WRT Y23.c Sample Mnemonic Files (All-format) om (a) PMC-RB4 233 Net comment .0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE ↓ A00.5 %@A ↓ %@0 ↓ 2 BINARY↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC–RB4 ↓ % ↓ %@1 ↓ 01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓ 10 REMARKS↓ % ↓ %@2–C ↓ R0.c nc ce nt e r.1 UNIT–2–ACT↓ $1 ’$’POWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’ ↓ R0300.4 ↓ (* Inscribe the net comment here.0 ↓ OR R123.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON ↓ % ↓ %@5 ↓ X000 1 0 1 ID16C ↓ Y008 1 0 4 OD32A ↓ % ↓ %@E ↓ w w w .3.5.0 UNIT–3–POWER↓ $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’ ↓ R0200.8. Any characters which are input with personal computer can be used.0 ↓ $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’ ↓ P0008 OPEN–FRONT↓ $1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’ ↓ L0100 INITIALIZE↓ $1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’ ↓ % ↓ %@3 ↓ RD R1001.4 ↓ (* $P *) form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing) RD R101. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.4↓ % ↓ %@4 A00.4 ↓ AND R100.3 ↓ AND R1000.2 ↓ WRT Y2000. ) [Operation] 1) Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE. It is impossible to create a step sequence program with a text editor.5. D Example 2 The execution of Ladder Editing Package is suspended.BAT file with a standard text editor can also be executed.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of mnemonic editing. Create FLMNE. the original source program will not be replicated. and specify *. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3. mnemonic instructions cannot be coded.c om The Note if the Step Sequence Function is Selected When Setting a Model When using the step sequence method. VZ is activated and a list of files with the extension . Then. step sequence subprograms being ignored. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.8.BAT as follows: nc ce nt e User Batch File Execution w w w . Add parameter(s)? [A(Add). The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes: 1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions.7 The batch file FLMNE. or to read the program by means of mnemonic-to-source conversion. Hit any key! 8) Press any key. VZ must be defined in the environment variable PATH beforehand.BAT’. 3. (In this case. 7) To restart memu screen of mnemonic.6 r. the command processor COMMAND. The following message appears: Execute ’FLMNE.c VZ 2) 3) 4) 5) Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu. only ladder subprograms are converted to mnemonics. The mnemonic menu screen appears. A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of the FLMNE. Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution). 2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence source program.3. If a step sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic conversion.BAT as follows: 234 .HEX as the parameter.8.HEX is displayed.COM is activated and DOS commands are enabled.5. S(Stop)] 6) Specify A (Add). then to mnemonic-to-source conversion. D Example 1 The execution of mnemonic editing is suspended and text editor VZ is activated. N(Not add). terminate VZ. These files can now be referenced by pressing the Enter key. [Operation] 1) Press F3 on the utility screen. OPERATION B–62884EN/01 COMMAND 3. enabling their reference using a commercially available editor.1 of Appendix C. 2) Then.BAT) Upon the completion of compile or decompile processing.err: Execution result file/.5.err The user can specify the type of files to be referenced. see Section 3. 235 .9 (a) Utility Screen 1) Moving to the DOS command line (starting COMMAND.9 Utility UTILITY F1 Dos F2 floadat F3 View result F4 Linker om Selecting [UTILTY] from the off-line menu enables the use of the utility functions. These files are of text format. (1) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing (starting FLVIEW.5. these files can be referenced even before Ladder Editing Package is terminated.) F2 : floadat 3) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing F3 : View result F4 : Linker nc 4) Link function w w w . an execution result file and map file are created.3.COM) ce nt e F1 : Dos 2) Data transfer between the P-G and personal computer (FLOADAT) (For details. BAT %P. For an explanation of how to perform this registration. EXEC FILE NAME FLVIEW.3.map: Map file). simply by changing the file name extension (.4 in Appendix C. The following functions are registered at installation: r. the pop-up screen shown below appears. The user can register any desired command as a utility. however. By using this function.c Fig. see Section 3.c 3) detailed below. see Section “3.10 “ON-LINE FUNCTION” can be selected from the off-line menu. w w w . OPERATION B–62884EN/01 3.c nc ce nt e r.5.4 On-Line Function”.3. For details.c om Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function 236 . ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4 ERROR MESSAGE LIST function–name : E–xxxx : error–message om This chapter describes the general output messages. etc.c Name of the processing which caused the error ce nt e The processing causing the error is represented by a single alphabetic character. The system can be operated. Messages are output and categorized: Error number (four digits) Category (error. D F: Fatal error. Processing is continued. warning. but processing of the user program cannot be continued because of an error. Processing is continued.c nc Funcion name w w w (2) Message category Output messages are classified into the following categories. Alternatively. The results will be retained. The categories are represented by single alphabetic characters. The error number is 2xxx. Processing A B C D E F G H I J K L N Initial menu and option setting Title editing I/O module editing System parameter editing Ladder diagram/step diagram editing Symbol and comment editing Message editing Printing Compilation Decompilation Mnemonic conversion Input/Output On–line monitor . the processing is stopped. but the results will be lost.4.) (1) Function name r. D E: Error. but cannot be guaranteed. The error number is 3xxx. The error number is 4xxx. 237 . D W: Warning. A:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. A:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST 4. The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain necessary files.1 Fatal Error Contents INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.c Number 238 .1 B–62884EN/01 (Program Name Selection. A:F–2004 THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LADDER.c nc ce nt e A:F–2000 om Message r. Option Setting. A:F–2006 NOT FOUND XXXX FILE. On–Line Execution) A : INITIAL MENU 4.4. Check the source program files. A:F–2010 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BROKEN. A:F–2007 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM. A:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG FILE (S). A:F–2009 CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.1. w w w . A:E–3148 XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. Check the input source program name. A:E–3124 CANNOT CREATE NEW PROGRAM XXXX. CANNOT OPEN FILE. The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space on the disk. HIT ANY File xxxx cannot be read. A:E–3133 INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.c nc File xxxx cannot be opened. The specified path does not exist. A:E–3137 CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX. An error occurred during file access. The name of the source program has not been input. A:E–3146 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR. A:E–3138 ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM NAME.1. A:E–3139 ILLEGAL XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME. A:E–3147 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. A:E–3126 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIFFERENT. FORMAT–A/B cannot be used. A:E–3132 XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR. 239 .4.2 Error Number Message Contents ENTER PROGRAM NAME. For details. KEY. A:E–3144 CANNOT CLOSE FILE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. A:E–3140 NOT FOUND FILE.2. A:E–3128 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. The specified source program is not compatible with the system.) The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because its data was destroyed. A:E–3145 FILE I/O ERROR. A:E–3121 THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES NOT EXIST. Input another source program name. Convert the program via a memory card or mnemonic format file. A:E–3130 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. w w A:E–3143 Data cannot be written to file xxxx. ce nt e r. w . For details of which machine models are compatible. Reinstall the system.2. File xxxx cannot be opened. File xxxx cannot be closed. see Section 1. A:E–3122 PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND. A:E–3131 XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR. Input the source program name. A:E–3125 ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PROGRAM NAME. HIT ANY KEY.TBL) cannot be found. File xxxx cannot be created. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files in the disk to create more free space. Some system files (xxxx. The specified source program cannot be created because a directory having the same name already exists. (XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED. see Appendix D. A:E–3134 INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED. File xxxx cannot be closed.c om A:E–3120 File xxxx cannot be read. A FORMAT–A/B program was specified when copying a source program. 1 Error Message Contents B:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR. B:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. B:E–3022 FILE I/O ERROR. w w w . ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.2 B : TITLE EDITING 4.c om Number 240 . HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program title file (TITLE) or control file (CONTROL).2.4.c nc ce nt e r. HIT ANY KEY An error occurred during file access. HIT ANY KEY The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read. Specify slot 0. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range. C:E–3034 INVALID DATA. C:E–3032 THE SAME GROUP. C:E–3026 APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST The specified slot does not exist. and slot have already been assigned modules. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range. Specify different group. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure. IS SPE. The specified group. Specify base 0. EXCEPT ’0’. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL). w 4. C:W–4022 BOTH I/O UNIT–A AND UNIT–B ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME GROUP. C:E–3024 APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST The specified group does not exist. and slot have already been assigned modules. w C:W–4020 Message Contents The specified group.BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.3 C : I/O MODULE EDITING 4. base. HIT ANY KEY The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read. I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B cannot be assigned to the same group. Specify different groups. I/O UNIT B. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range. C:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID Input data is invalid.4. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for the group.1 Error Message Contents C:E–3021 FILE READ ERROR. a base other than base 0 cannot be speciCIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT fied. EXCEPT ’0’.BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.c nc The specified module does not exist.c ce nt e . a slot other than slot CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS 0 cannot be specified. APPOINT The specified channel does not exist. C:E–3033 INVALID CHANNEL NO. 241 . base.For the I/O Unit–B module. and slot numbers.3. base. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm which channels can be specified. C:E–3027 APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST C:E–3028 INPUT KEY NOT USED C:E–3030 ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL The specified module cannot be used at this address. base. C:E–3025 APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST The specified base does not exist. Check whether the output module is specified at address X and whether the input module is specified at address Y.3. C:E–3022 FILE WRITE ERROR.For I/O Unit–B (xxx:power–on/off information).2 om Number Warning w Number THE SAME GROUP. and slot. C:W–4021 INVALID DATA. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the module names that can be specified. IS SPE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. B. r. D:E–3022 INVALID VALUE D:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID D:E–3024 OPERATER PANEL ADDRESS ERROR r.1 om Error Message Contents D:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR.4. HIT ANY KEY The source program system parameter file (SYSPARAM) cannot be read. D:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. specify the following address: 7) KEY ADDRESS 8) LED ADDRESS 9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS 10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS 242 .4. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program system parameter file (SYSPARAM) or control file (CONTROL).4 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING 4.c nc ce nt e When 1 (YES) is set in 6) OPERATOR PANEL (which specifies whether the F0 operator panel is used or not). ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.c Number w w w . c E:F–2100 Contents Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) Number Message ce nt e 4.5. E:F–2102 CANNOT SEEK ∗ FILE. E:E–3120 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE E:E–3121 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST E:E–3122 SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT FILE FORMAT w E:E–3114 A Format–B and C programs were found to exist when renaming a Format–A program. 243 . r.2 INPUT INVALID E:E–3101 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING E:E–3102 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING E:E–3103 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL E:E–3104 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL E:E–3105 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. E:E–3106 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL E:E–3107 PARAMETER NOTHING E:E–3108 LADDER ILLEGAL E:E–3109 ERROR NET FOUND E:E–3110 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT E:E–3111 PLEASE COMPLETE NET E:E–3112 ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED E:E–3113 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING Contents w w .5.1 Number om Fatal Error Message CANNOT READ ∗ FILE. E:F–2101 CANNOT WRITE ∗ FILE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. E:E–3119 PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.4.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING 4.c nc E:E–3100 FUNCTION NOT FOUND E:E–3115 LADDER BROKEN E:E–3116 ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING E:E–3117 STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT) ERR E:E–3118 PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. The sequence in the select branch is other than ”transition to step to transition. E:E–3128 ILLEGAL SYMBOL A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbol editing. E:E–3125 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAME EXISTS E:E–3126 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED. E:E–3206 SELECTED BRANCH ERROR.” 244 . E:E–3202 NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO BIG. An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size. branch. E:E–3205 UNCONNECTED STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM. E:E–3127 SOURCE PROGRAM OF ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS A Format–B and C programs. transition. The maximum allowable number of element tables has been exceeded. or line is not continuous. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME E:E–3124 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB– PROGRAM An invalid subprogram name was input. A read error occurred when reading the specified intermediate code file.c om E:E–3123 nc An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing LATMP with the File function. E:E–3129 PROGRAM OPEN ERROR E:E–3130 PROGRAM NOT EXIST E:E–3131 NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE E:E–3132 PROGRAM NOT READ E:E–3133 PROGRAM NOT WRITE E:E–3134 DIRECTORY NOT EXIST E:E–3135 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST E:E–3136 PROGRAM IS OPENED E:E–3137 PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER E:E–3138 CAN NOT RENAME LATMP E:E–3139 PROGRAM NOT EXIST ce nt e r. The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been exceeded. w w w E:E–3200 E:E–3204 SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG. IF YOU SELECT TO ZOOM ’∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗’. E:E–3207 PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR.4.5. E:E–3201 BUFFER SIZE OVER. the sequence in the parallel branch is other than ”step to transition to step. E:E–3208 SYNTAX ERROR. having the same name as that specified for the Copy/Move to file function.c Error (at Editing Step Sequence) Number Message Contents ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE. The start side of the select branch does not agree with its end side. E:E–3203 NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG. was found to exist during Format–A program editing.” Or.3 . 4. The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded. The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side. The step. the maximum coordinate value is exceeded. E:E–3236 CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. The same file already exists. The temporary file cannot be deleted. No subprogram number is specified. The specified coordinate value does not exist. but with a different extension. and serial move (vertical line). E:E–3228 LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR. The copy destination is invalid. and jump (dummy step). if inserted. E:E–3216 CHART SEQUENCE ERROR. step. Check which step numbers are already in use. E:E–3229 CANNOT DELETE TEMPORARY FILE.c om E:E–3209 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB– PROGRAM. The specified step number is already in use. E:E–3231 INPUT INVALID. The step line contains an element other than initial step. w E:E–3233 An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers. Insertion is not possible at the specified location. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Message Contents STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR. E:E–3219 JUMP CLOSE ERROR. E:E–3222 BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR. E:E–3210 TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX ERROR. 245 . The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited. E:E–3225 ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. E:E–3224 CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. The chart start code does not exist (step). JUMP has not been closed correctly. w w .) E:E–3221 BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. E:E–3218 CHART END CODE ERROR. E:E–3237 CANNOT CHANGE DATA. A branch contains two or more left end codes. The branch connection is invalid. The step line is not properly connected to the transition line. jump (dummy step). block step. E:E–3212 CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM. Or. E:E–3232 EXPECTED ADDRESS. The chart end code does not exist. E:E–3214 JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR. (Invalid data exists before and after the branch code. E:E–3220 HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE ERROR. The intermediate code file cannot be deleted. E:E–3234 ILLEGAL FILE NAME. E:E–3227 STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR. E:E–3226 STRINGS NOT FOUND. E:E–3235 SUB–PROGRAM ALREADY ENTRIED. E:E–3213 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL. There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and end codes. A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing an element. E:E–3211 CANNOT INSERT. The transition line contains an element other than initial step. The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist. step. Data outside the address range is set. The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not been completely checked. The specified character string does not exist. A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of the branch. E:E–3230 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAME EXISTS.c nc ce nt e r. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid. E:E–3223 CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS. E:E–3215 CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR. E:E–3217 CHART START CODE ERROR. The move destination is invalid. The specified label is already defined.4. block step. IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE.c nc E:W–4110 246 . E:W–4111 MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOT CONSISTENCY ! w w w .4 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) Number Message ILLEGAL OPERATION E:W–4101 EDIT BUFFER OVER E:W–4102 70LINE/1NET OVER E:W–4103 LARGE NET APPEARED E:W–4104 MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER E:W–4105 SET COUNT OVER E:W–4106 256STEP/1NET OVER E:W–4107 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WAS CANCELLED E:W–4108 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED.c om E:W–4100 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED. ce nt e r. E:W–4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED.5.IF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND. IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.4. 4. w w w .1 Error Message om Number INPUT DATA ILLEGAL. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.6 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING 4.c nc F:E–3108 247 . F:E–3109 INPUT ADDRESS DATA.c F:E–3100 SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS. F:E–3101 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE F:E–3102 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST F:E–3103 NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED F:E–3104 NOT FOUND DATA ERROR F:E–3105 FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY F:E–3106 FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY F:E–3107 DATA SAVE ERROR ce nt e r. F:E–3110 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.6. G:E–3101 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.4.c om G:E–3100 248 .7 G : MESSAGE EDITING 4. w w w .1 Error Number Message ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT ∗. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. G:E–3102 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ∗ WERE DELETED.7.c nc ce nt e r. w w H:E–3112 An attempt was made to reserve memory. but there was insufficient free space.4. H:E–3106 CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE. The maximum number of steps that can be printed is 32767.2 Error Number Message Contents INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. An error occurred upon writing to the output file. The symbol data is invalid. om Number r. An error occurred upon reading a net comment. H:E–3113 NET COMMENT FILE READ ERROR. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.8. Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.8 H : PRINTOUT 4.1 Fatal Error Message Contents H:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG FILE(S). File xxxx does not exist. ($) H:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ ERROR. H:E–3101 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.8. H:E–3102 CANNOT READ XXXX FILE. The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram has been exceeded. An error occurred upon reading symbol data. H:E–3107 OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.c 4. ce nt e H:E–3100 249 . H:E–3109 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED There is insufficient free space on the disk. An error occurred upon opening the output file. H:E–3104 NOT EXIST XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be found. w . H:E–3110 INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE FREE There is insufficient free space on the disk to perform cross–reference. H:E–3114 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BROKEN. Reserve xxxx bytes of XXXX BYTE FREE free space. File xxxx cannot be opened. H:E–3105 DATA INVALID XXXX FILE. H:E–3103 NOT FOUND XXXX FILE. H:E–3108 WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. File xxxx cannot be read. H:E–3111 STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.c nc The format of file xxxx is invalid. H:W–4102 SEL SWITCH OFF The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. H:W–4101 CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of printing.8.3 Warning Number Message Contents CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. Press the SEL button such that the indicator lights.4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.c nc ce nt e r. The <BREAK> key was pressed during file output. w w w .c om H:W–4100 250 . An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists. TRY ANOTHER WORD Input the password correctly. I:E–3220 SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAMETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUCTION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE. I:E–3200 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. I:E–3222 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. The source file for the title data does not exist. Source program xxxx does not exist.4.c Error Message Contents XXXX READ ERROR The source program cannot be read. The ladder program is empty. (This error normally does not occur during compilation. An out–of–range label number or an address other than a label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.9.) I:E–3101 XXXX WRITE ERROR I:E–3102 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME ILLEGAL. ce nt e I:E–3100 w w w . I:E–3250 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. I:E–3111 THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED AS PASSWORD. An out–of–range value is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx. An invalid source program name is specified. I:E–3108 TITLE READ ERROR. An out–of–range program number or an address other than a program number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.) I:E–3105 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FORMAT IS DIFFERENT.c nc The compilation results cannot be written. I:E–3221 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. A functional instruction is lacking a required coil. I:E–3112 ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE ALLOWED The input password contains a non–alphanumeric character. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist. The source program format is FORMAT–A.1 Fatal Error Number Message Contents NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE I:F–2101 OUT OF MEMORY om I:F–2100 4. The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name. 251 . I:E–3201 THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH NEEDS THE COIL. The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.9. I:E–3109 I/O MODULE READ ERROR.9 I : COMPILE 4. (This error normally does not occur during compilation. Specify the END1 or END2 instruction.2 Number r.) I:E–3107 SYSTEM PARAMETER READ ERROR. I:E–3223 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. I:E–3110 VERIFICATION ERROR The input password differs from the registered password.) I:E–3103 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT FOUND. (This error normally does not occur during compilation. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. (This error normally does not occur during compilation. I:E–3274 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because the END instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program. I:E–3273 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram. Make the second level smaller. I:E–3252 LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program. I:E–3317 END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. I:E–3310 THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION. I:E–3330 THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION. The END1 instruction is not found at the end of the first level. the ladder cannot be executed. or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter. I:E–3293 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM. I:E–3290 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM. It cannot be used in the main program. An unrecognizable instruction exists. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message Contents THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE. END1 is specified for other than the first level.c om Number I:E–3251 252 . A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end of the subprogram. END2 is specified for other than the second level. The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specified for the selected program type. Make the first level smaller. I:E–3315 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END3 INSTRUCTION. or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter. No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because the END1 instruction indicates the end of the first level. I:E–3311 THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTION. SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction because the END3 instruction indicates the end of the third level. It cannot be used in the main program. I:E–3270 SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. I:E–3314 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END2 INSTRUCTION. I:E–3320 END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. I:E–3254 THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF LADDER EXCEEDS 99. The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program. Because the number of second level divisions in the main program exceeds the maximum of 99. I:E–3319 END3 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. w w w . The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level. I:E–3318 END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. The END3 instruction is not found at the end of the third level. A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram. I:E–3253 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction because the END2 instruction indicates the end of the second level. The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction. I:E–3312 THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION. I:E–3271 SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. is specified. The END instruction is specified for the first level. that indicates the start of the instruction control range. END3 is specified for other than the third level. I:E–3272 JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program.c nc ce nt e r. It cannot be used in the main program. I:E–3313 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION. I:E–3291 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute. I:E–3292 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram. I:E–3316 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION. SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. the ladder cannot be executed.4. Specify unique label numbers. I:E–3335 COME INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION. I:E–3340 THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION. I:E–3333 ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. that indicates the start of the instruction control range. The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range. used to indicate the start of the range. w I:E–3400 w I:E–3421 253 . Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jump destinations with the LBL instruction. Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range step number or an address other than a step number. The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type. The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range.c om Number I:E–3331 The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside to a point outside the COM instruction control range. I:E–3422 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. is not specified. A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump block when the end of the block has already been defined as a number of coils. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message Contents CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. I:E–3342 JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH JMP. I:E–3353 THE DESTINATION OF JMPB INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ COME INSTRUCTION. The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instruction exceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for the selected program type. A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specified when no JMP instruction. The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block.4. I:E–3352 TOO MANY LABELS. is not specified. AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. I:E–3351 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. I:E–3350 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. but the JMPE instruction. The COM instruction. A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram. I:E–3423 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. I:E–3334 COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH COM. or vice versa. Decrease the number of defined jump destinations. I:E–3343 JMPE INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION. Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range label number or an address other than a label number. I:E–3332 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range program number or an address other than a program number. is specified twice within the range. that indicates the start of a block. I:E–3440 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.c nc ce nt e r. that indicates the end of the instruction control range. w . The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruction control range when the end of the range has already been defined as a number of coils. The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the jump destination. I:E–3420 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. The COME instruction. The parameter of the program start instruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name. is specified when the COM instruction. I:E–3341 ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION. THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. is specified. JMPB operations can be performed only entirely within the range or entirely outside the range. Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jump block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of the first block. that indicates the end of the block. I:E–3620 THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM XXXX. I:E–3640 LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION. is within the COM instruction control range. indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction. Reduce the number of jump destination definitions. symbol. (MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COMMENT + LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) The combined size of the message.4. two or more LBL instruction jump destinations have identical label numbers. Define label xxxx in the second level. Reduce IS TOO LARGE. I:E–3650 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. I:E–3600 DATA TOO LARGE. Define a unique label number for each jump destination. Define a unique step number for each step. the total number of characters. Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Label xxxx. A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end of the subprogram.c w w THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL. indicating a jump destination. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in the main program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified for the selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in the main program. Create a subprogram file having this number. No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence program. The selected program does not contain any subprogram file numbered xxxx. I:E–3443 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM. I:E–3442 STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. Place label xxxx outside the range. Label xxxx. the END instruction is placed at the end of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram having a higher program number. 254 . cannot be placed in other than the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Or. Reduce the size of any of these data types. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction. I:E–3461 TOO MANY LABELS.c ce nt e nc . I:E–3601 DATA TOO LARGE. I:E–3480 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS. The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when it is followed by a subprogram. I:E–3652 TOO MANY LABELS. comment. I:E–3651 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. ladder. and step sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected program type. w I:E–3653 om I:E–3441 THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN THE RANGE OF THE COM INSTRUCTION. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction. I:E–3570 THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum number of characters that can be specified for the selected program type. I:E–3462 DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT DLBL. Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers. (LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence program exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected program type. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the number allowed for step sequence editing. The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram. I:E–3654 r. Define a unique label number for each jump destination. I:E–3460 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS. In the main program. 4. the end of the range being identified by the COME instruction. This program is. The comment data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. P1. I:W–4203 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED. output to a memory card file. These characters are replaced by spaces. P1.c nc The FORMAT–B data does not include a net comment. Make the first level smaller.c ce nt e Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT–B.PANEL (PARAMETER). THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT I:W–4105 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FORMAT–B.#LA in the above example). I:W–4600 UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAM XXXX. w I:W–4500 om I:W–4100 w I:W–4501 255 . The value of this parameter is changed to NO during compilation. Specifying this item has no effect. The ladder program is the first to be compiled (P1. The step sequence program is empty. I:W–4202 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED. r. The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed.#LA and SAME NUMBER EXIST. None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file. The specified number of coils is ignored..g. PROCEED TO COMPILE USING ’NO’ Necessary addresses (key address. I:W–4570 THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. This character is replaced by a space. w .) are not set when YES is specified for the system parameter indicating whether the F0 operator panel is to be used. This pointer is not output to a memory card file. The specified number of coils is ignored. The ladder program is empty. I:W–4400 THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM. This step sequence program is not output to a memory card file. This ladder program is not output to a memory card file. Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED: NET COMMENT I:W–4200 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. I:W–4103 MULTIPLE SUB–PROGRAMS WITH Two subprograms have identical numbers (e. The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils. The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment character string. I:W–4101 ILLEGAL OP.9.535 characters have been input as comment data. THE COMMENT DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE. etc. I:W–4502 COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS 64KB. or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter. THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. however. The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified as a number of coils.#SS). I:W–4201 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. More than 65. This character is replaced by a space. The message data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. I:W–4102 EDITING SUB–PROGRAM HAS NOT COMPLETED. I:W–4104 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FORMAT–B. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. Complete the editing of this subprogram.3 Warning Number Message Contents THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE CODE. I:W–4204 UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND. LED address. the end location being identified by the JMPE instruction. This character is replaced by a space. The title data contains kana or kanji characters. Error Message r. Install valid system data. prepare a valid memory card file.10. The file is invalid. The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the system–defined limit before the program was executed. Enter the password correctly. w .(ADDRESS XXXX) An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the I/O module data. J:F–2101 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match the ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT selected program type. SYSTEM:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx The function code specified in the memory card file does not match that defined in the system. Memory card file xxxx cannot be read.10 J : DECOMPILATION 4.c nc Number ce nt e 4. J:E–3101 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. Data cannot be written to source program xxxx. J:E–3200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end with the SPE instruction. the system’s function code after SYSTEM. J:F–2103 MISMATCHED PASSWORD.2 om Number Contents THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. The program cannot be executed. Create the file. The entered password is invalid. The program thus cannot be executed. ID CODE (I/O MODULE) ERROR. DATA:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.4. FILE. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type. J:F–2102 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE NOT FOUND. Select a valid program. reduce the symbol data size. J:F–2105 ’XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAM WRITE ERROR.1 Fatal Error Message Contents J:F–2100 FUNCTION CODE ERROR.10. J:F–2104 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE READ ERROR.c J:E–3100 w w J:E–3300 256 . The file’s function code appears immediately after DATA. 3 Warning Message Contents THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE. J:W–4901 ’%%%FLSET. depending on the setting of the symbol merge option. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF’ READ FAILED. The operator panel specification in the system parameter data is invalid. processing continues. r. This symbol data is not output to the source program. J:W–4201 XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLICATED ADDRESS FOUND. SYMBOL XXXX) The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address. SYMBOL XXXX) The total number of data items exceeded the system–defined limit when the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx).c w THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D ADDRESS. w J:W–4301 om Number J:W–4100 The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC version of PMC–RC is earlier than 3. xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net comment character string.4. The subprogram is output to the source program. SETTING HAS CHANGED INTO DEFAULT. These net comment pointers are not output to the source program. Create a valid file or modify the file settings.c ce nt e nc . J:W–4102 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT STRINGS FOUND. Edit the step sequence as necessary. The option reset function key may be used. The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. J:W–4104 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. (ADDRESS XXXX.10. Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram.CNF file. J:W–4204 SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL. (SYMBOL XXXX) The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address. xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any net comment pointer. Symbol character check is not performed. The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot be read. The file settings have returned to the defaults. J:W–4103 XXXX DUPLICATED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND. Data subsequent to this symbol data is not output to the source program. J:W–4200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. This symbol data is not output to the source program. However. Character strings are copied so that the same net comment character strings have the same net comment pointers. These net comment character strings are deleted. When this check is not made. This symbol data is not output to the source program. (ADDRESS XXXX. ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE ILLEGAL. J:W–4203 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. To output it to the source file. change the setting in the %%%FLSET. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary. SYMBOL XXXX) The indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) was found to be invalid as a result of the IEC–compliant symbol character string check. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address.CNF file cannot be read. Either the source data or the memory card data becomes valid. The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder program exceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selected program type. (ADDRESS XXXX. xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. J:W–4900 ’OPTION’ READ FAILED. w J:W–4800 257 . Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel specification. SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT CHECKED. Change the PMC version in the system parameter. processing may be continued even without making the changes. J:W–4300 ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYSTEM PARAMETER). J:W–4101 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND. PROCEED TO DECOMPILE USING ’NO’. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary. J:W–4202 SAME SYMBOL EXISTS. K:F–2109 EXPECTED IDCODE. K:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE. K:F–2115 EXPECTED ’/PC’ OPTION.11. K:F–2116 ’XXXX’ EXECUTABLE FILE NOT FOUND. K:F–2113 ILLEGAL NAME OF SET–UP FILE. K:F–2007 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAM. K:F–2107 EXPECTED TERMINATOR. K:F–2112 NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL VARIABLE ’TMP’.c nc ce nt e r. K:F–2114 NOT FOUND SET–UP FILE. The functional instruction contains more parameters than are required. w w w . K:F–2104 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4.4. K:F–2106 ILLEGAL IDCODE. K:F–2101 SET–UP FILE BROKEN.1 Number om Fatal Error Message Contents INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION 4. K:F–2111 CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN CURRENT DIRECTORY. K:F–2117 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL. K:F–2108 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM SOURCE–PROGRAM. K:F–2110 ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S). K:F–2102 ILLEGAL OPTION(S).c K:F–2000 258 . Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified. K:F–2100 FILE I/O ERROR. K:F–2006 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ FILE. K:F–2105 ILLEGAL OPTION–SPECIFIED FILE. K:F–2103 INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S). A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the functional instruction. or message data contains invalid character data. An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table. An output prohibited address is specified for the coil. K:E–3101 ’XXXX’ SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BROKEN. K:E–3105 CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS OF PARAMETER. An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specified in the symbol and comment data. K:E–3103 CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYSTEM. K:E–3118 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. K:E–3113 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS WITH COIL. title data.c om The mnemonic of extended symbol ’%@2–C’ is converted when %%%FLSET. w K:E–3119 The basic instruction has no address. An output prohibited address is specified as the output address parameter of the functional instruction. An output module is specified as the input address of the I/O module data. EXPECTED ADDRESS. The system parameter.4.11. K:E–3117 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. K:E–3124 ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA TABLE. 259 . K:E–3112 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS. or message data. A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parameter of the functional instruction. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 5. K:E–3108 CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MODULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS. K:E–3106 CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS ON BASIC INSTRUCTION. K:E–3123 ILLEGAL ADDRESS.2 Error Number Message Contents K:E–3100 ’XXXX’ FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.c nc ce nt e r. w w . symbol and comment data. K:E–3110 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT ADDRESS. K:E–3107 CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MODULE AT INPUT ADDRESS. An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction address parameter. K:E–3126 ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). K:E–3125 ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAMETER.CNF is a FORMAT–A/B file. A byte address is specified for the basic instruction. K:E–3104 CANNOT OVERWRITE EXISTING DATA. An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O module data. K:E–3120 EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER. K:E–3121 EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). The functional instruction has no parameter. K:E–3109 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS PROHIBITED USING AS PARAMETER. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 2. K:E–3111 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE ADDRESS. K:E–3114 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD ADDRESS. K:E–3102 CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE ’%@2–C’. K:E–3122 IDCODE NOT FOUND IN ’XXXX’. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. An odd–number prohibited address is specified as an odd–number address. K:E–3131 ILLEGAL VALUE. w w . K:E–3130 ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. K:E–3147 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE. K:E–3142 INVALID MODULE NAME. K:E–3156 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SUB PROGRAM FILE. The module name of the I/O module is not found. K:E–3135 ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data. The module name of the I/O module data is invalid. K:E–3146 LACK OF XXXX FILE. w K:E–3153 K:E–3155 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCE– PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE. K:E–3143 RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS E2BIG(=7). K:E–3138 INPUT SOURCE–PROGRAM NAME. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data. The slot data of the I/O module is not found. K:E–3136 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S). K:E–3133 ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. K:E–3154 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PROCESS INTERFACE FILE. 260 . K:E–3139 INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT DATA. symbol and comment data. K:E–3141 INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER. K:E–3145 INVALID QUALIFIER. Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data. K:E–3159 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF ADDRESS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specified. ladder. The system parameter contains an invalid value. K:E–3129 ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. K:E–3134 ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. The data number of the data identifier is invalid. K:E–3157 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. title data. K:E–3149 NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). The system parameter contains an invalid data number. K:E–3151 NOT FOUND GROUP DATA.c nc The system parameter. K:E–3144 INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECIFIED SOURSE–PROGRAM. ce nt e r. The group data of the I/O module is not found. K:E–3140 INVALID FUNCTION’S NAME. K:E–3132 ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents ILLEGAL SOURCE–PROGRAM NAME. or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character. K:E–3137 INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME. An out–of–range address is specified as a message setting address. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruction.4.c om K:E–3127 An unsupported functional instruction is specified. K:E–3148 MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND. data table. K:E–3158 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instruction TABLE. NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. K:E–3150 NOT FOUND BASE DATA. K:E–3152 NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. K:E–3128 ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME. The base data of the I/O module is not found. K:E–3173 SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT FOUND. The group. message data. base. An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instruction parameter. K:E–3181 TOO LONG STRINGS. and slot data of the I/O module data all have the same number. w .4. The data contains an undefined instruction. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instruction data table. The functional instruction contains more parameters than are required. w K:E–3192 K:E–3194 DATA ENTRY ERROR. exceeds the maximum. A parameter is specified for an instruction that requires no parameters. An out–of–range value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data. Double–byte characters cannot be used in symbol data.(XXXX) K:E–3174 SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B ’XXXX’. An out–of–range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data K:E–3167 PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instruction parameter. An out–of–range value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data. An address is specified in a location where it is not required.c nc ce nt e r. title data. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed. Although comment data exists. K:E–3164 OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. K:E–3161 OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parameter or data identifier. K:E–3163 OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA. K:E–3168 PROCESS ERROR. K:E–3193 UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER. K:E–3178 SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. K:E–3187 TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 LINE. K:E–3162 OUT OF VALUE. K:E–3191 UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. The symbol data contains a double–byte character. The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter. K:E–3165 OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. K:E–3179 THE SAME GROUP.c om K:E–3160 UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. mnemonic data. there is no symbol data. K:E–3166 OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA. message data. An out–of–range value is specified in the system parameter. K:E–3176 SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER. Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address. The length of the system parameter. w K:E–3190 UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). 261 .AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. K:E–3177 SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. or I/O module data exceeds the limit.BASE. K:E–3188 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Message Contents OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF PARAMETER. symbol and comment mnemonic data. K:E–3172 SOURCE–PROGRAM NOT FOUND. K:E–3189 TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT The sum of the base data and slot data values of the I/O module data IS OVER. K:E–3195 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA. or title data exceeds the maximum. K:W–4110 LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN REGISTER(S). System parameter ’OP. K:W–4112 NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDITION (S). A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.11. message data.3 Warning Number Message Contents COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. The message data contain a double–byte character. message data. is found.PANEL’ contains an invalid value. K:W–4109 LOGICAL OPERATED WITH UNUSED REGISTER(S). PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE USING ’NO’. 262 . No control condition is specified for the functional instruction. K:W–4101 DATA NOT FOUND. Message data xxxx contains a double–byte or single–byte katakana character. or to any subprogram. K:W–4114 NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUMBERED XXXX. or I/O module data does not exist. K:W–4122 SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE FOUND AT END OF LADDER DATA. AND SLOT. symbol and comment data. The group. This indicates that there is data subsequent to the last SPE. K:W–4113 NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX ADDRESS. (For FORMAT–C only) K:W–4107 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S). Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not specified. K:W–4115 NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED XXXX. K:W–4119 OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.4. the value is converted to ”NO.c om K:W–4100 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PMC–OS FILE. K:W–4111 MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT ’XXXX’. K:W–4102 DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. title data. K:W–4104 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT ’XXXX’. K:W–4120 INVALID QUALIFIER.” K:W–4106 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.’ K:W–4105 ILLEGAL OP. K:W–4108 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA. K:W–4123 SPECIFY SAME GROUP. w .c nc ce nt e r.BASE. The system parameter. No message is defined for address xxxx. Only symbol data was converted to the address. base. XXXX w K:W–4116 OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S). K:W–4121 REGISTERS OVERFLOW.PANEL(PARAMETER). K:W–4103 EXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION (S). symbol and comment data. K:W–4117 NOT USED NET COMMENT POINTER EXIST. Comment data containing a double–byte character was converted without the double–byte character conversion option (J option). Invalid character data exists in ’xxxx. title data. data that does not belong to level 1 to 3. and slot data of the I/O module data all have the same number. During conversion to Format–B. w K:W–4118 An invalid character follows the end code ”%” of the system parameter. ladder data. The symbol data is nonstandard (check level–1). or I/O module data. An operation was performed using a register that is not registered in the ladder data. ) Comment titles other than that specified first are deleted. w K:W–4138 om Number Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coil comment at the same address. K:W–4134 SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST. A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for which no control conditions are required. The comment data is replaced by spaces. K:W–4137 COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY EXIST. an identical symbol may be specified in more than one location.4. BECAUSE OF EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.) Coil comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces. K:W–4136 COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY EXIST. relay comment at the same address. an identical character string may be specified in more than one location. (For FORMAT–C. (For FORMAT–C only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces. TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL COMMENT DATA. K:W–4132 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYMBOL DATA.3.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.c ce nt e nc . K:W–4128 UNEXPECTED COIL(S). (For FORMAT–C. K:W–4127 TOO MANY CONTROL CONDITIONS. The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. r. The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum (six characters for FORMAT–A and FORMAT–B. (For FORMAT–C. K:W–4133 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT DATA. K:W–4131 REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA. K:W–4135 RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the same EXIST. Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address. The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses.c w TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY COMMENT DATA. When the start code of the symbol data is ”%@2. (For FORMAT–C. Two or more different character strings are specified for the same comment title at the same address.8.” the symbol definition must not be specified more than once.) Relay comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces. The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces. The functional instruction is subject to too many control conditions. K:W–4130 REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS DATA. Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message Contents K:W–4124 SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP) AT I/O UNIT–B AS I/O UNIT–A. The second and subsequent definitions are ignored.5. w K:W–4139 263 . an identical character string may be specified in more than one location. The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. see Section 3. For information relating to the start code. (For FORMAT–C only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces. K:W–4126 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ’XXXX’ WERE DELETED. K:W–4125 SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B. A coil was specified when not required by the functional instruction. The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. K:W–4140 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT TITLE DATA. (For FORMAT–C only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces. 16 characters for FORMAT–C). The symbol data is replaced by spaces. K:W–4129 UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION(S). an identical character string may be specified in more than one location. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. L:E–3160 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid. L:E–3156 WORK FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the work file. L:E–3102 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT 4. L:E–3159 ROM FILE READ ERROR The ROM file cannot be read.c nc Access has been interrupted. L:E–3151 WORK FILE OPEN ERROR The work file cannot be opened. L:E–3181 DIAGNOSIS ERROR An error was detected during EROM diagnosis. L:E–3101 ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR The currently set cassette or module does not match the currently selected machine model. L:E–3104 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file. L:E–3123 ROM FILE > ROM ERROR The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself. L:E–3152 WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR The work file cannot be initialized. L:E–3108 ACCESS CANCELED L:E–3109 FILE–ROM UNMATCH ERROR The file contents do not match the ROM data. L:E–3124 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.c om L:E–3100 w w . L:E–3105 FILE CLOSE ERROR The specified file cannot be closed. L:E–3103 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read. L:E–3107 TIME OUT ERROR No response was received within a specified period after the PC issued an instruction. L:E–3180 ROM SET ERROR The EROM is mounted improperly. L:E–3110 CONTROL CODE ERROR The control code is invalid. L:E–3121 ROM DATA CAN’T CONDENSE ERROR The ROM data cannot be compressed. and whether the contents of CONFIG. ce nt e r. w L:E–3154 264 .SYS are valid. FILE L:E–3126 ROM COUNT ERROR The ROM count is invalid. cable connections and parameters (baud rate and stop bit). L:E–3120 FIRST RECORD INFORMATION ERROR The contents of the first record are invalid. S RECORD FORMAT ERROR The S record format is invalid. L:E–3183 COMPARE ERROR The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.12. L:E–3150 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The ROM file cannot be opened. L:E–3153 WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR The work file cannot be closed. L:E–3106 INVALID RECEIVE DATA Data other than an ISO code has been received. L:E–3157 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file. L:E–3182 EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR The EROM is faulty.4. L:E–3155 WORK FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file. File xxxx does not exist. Check the destination’s power source. L:E–3158 WORK FILE READ ERROR The work file cannot be read. settings.1 Error Number Message Contents NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. L:E–3125 ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid. L:E–3122 PART OF ROM DATA INVALID The ROM file data is invalid. L:E–3195 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. L:E–3211 IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Message Contents DATA FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted. INPUT DATA = . L:E–3215 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened. FILE DATA = L:E–3191 ’FLIO _AT. L:E–3204 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion.DAT file is invalid. L:E–3196 NO. L:E–3201 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized. L:E–3213 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file. L:E–3185 BLANK CHECK ERROR The EROM is not yet deleted. L:E–3200 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. L:E–3197 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that can perform memory card format conversion. L:E–3198 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range).DAT’ FILE FORMAT ERROR.c nc The memory card format conversion file does not exist. L:E–3190 COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = . L:E–3186 DATA SEND ERROR The number of data items is invalid. The format of the FLIO_AT. L:E–3206 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created. L:E–3199 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF FILE SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range). L:E–3194 NO. L:E–3214 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read. L:E–3192 MEMORY CARD ERROR An error occurred during memory card format conversion. L:E–3216 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does not exist. 265 . L:E–3210 BREAK PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation.4. L:E–3209 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file. L:E–3217 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF ROM SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). L:E–3202 NOT EXIST FILE L:E–3203 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.c om L:E–3184 w w w . L:E–3212 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid. L:E–3207 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened. L:E–3189 ROM TYPE ERROR The ROM type is invalid. L:E–3188 ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED The writer is in use. L:E–3187 PARITY ERROR A parity error occurred during data transmission. ce nt e r. L:E–3205 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. HIT ANY KEY. L:E–3193 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER An error occurred during memory card format conversion.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. L:E–3208 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card format conversion. L:E–3335 INVALID ’PARITY’ IN TEXT FILE ’Parity’ in the text file is invalid. L:E–3334 INVALID ’BAUD RATE’ IN TEXT FILE ’Baud Rate’ in the text file is invalid. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be obtained. L:E–3322 FILE DOES NOT EXIST The file does not exist. L:E–3221 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section. L:E–3325 CANNOT SEARCH STRING IN TEXT FILE The search character string is not found in the text file.c om L:E–3218 ERROR OF PORT SET COUNT The specified number of ports is invalid. L:E–3228 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.’ IN TEXT FILE ’Port No. L:E–3333 INVALID ’PORT NO. L:E–3230 PARAMETER ERROR (MEMORY CARD TYPE) An invalid parameter exists (memory card format). L:E–3330 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND (COULD NOT FILD COMMAND INTERPRETER) The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter is not found).4. L:E–3332 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND (FOR FEW MEMORIES)” The MODE command cannot be executed (there is insufficient memory). L:E–3328 THERE ARE MORE PARAMETERS IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED The text file contains too many parameters. L:E–3226 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY CARD The size of the memory card data section is invalid. L:E–3222 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file. L:E–3320 THE NUMBER OF PARAMERTERS IN FILE ARE WRONG The number of parameters specified in the text file is invalid. L:E–3331 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND (FOR INVALID COMMAND INTERPRETER) The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter format is invalid). w .c nc ce nt e r. L:E–3303 CANNOT EXECUTE CONVERSION The child process cannot be executed. L:E–3321 ERROR OF FUNCTION NO.’ in the text file is invalid. L:E–3304 INVALID PMC NAME The machine model name cannot be determined. The function number is invalid. L:E–3227 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid). L:E–3323 ERROR OF MEMORY ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory. L:E–3324 ’LF’ DOES NOT EXIST No line feed code exists. L:E–3306 MEMORY CARD FILE DOES NOT EXIST The MCARD format file does not exist. L:E–3220 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section. L:E–3219 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed. w w L:E–3326 266 . L:E–3229 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid. L:E–3225 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM SIZE Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than that of the count. L:E–3223 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file. L:E–3302 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME (1ST/2ND FILE NAME) The source and destination file names are both invalid. L:E–3224 DATA MAX OVER The data exceeds the maximum allowable size. L:E–3300 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME (1ST FILE NAME) The name of the source file for which format conversion is to be performed is invalid. L:E–3301 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME (2ND FILE NAME) The name of the destination file for source file conversion is invalid. L:E–3329 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND (FOR MORE THAN 128BITES) The MODE command cannot be executed (the specified argument is longer than 128 bites). Specified directory for backup does not exist. L:E–3402 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.c nc A data transmission error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). L:E–3340 PORT INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE END The port has been successfully initialized. L:E–3503 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened. L:E–3343 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE) The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found). ce nt e r. Format–A/B source program is specified. Change the data in the text file (FLIO_AT. L:E–3400 ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. see the comment section of FLIO_AT. L:E–3344 UNKNOWN PMC TYPE The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model. L:E–3509 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid. w w . L:E–3342 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME) The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid). – The program name is over 8 characters. L:E–3404 XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT EXIST. A time out error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). L:E–3505 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN ERROR The source file for which format conversion is to be performed cannot be opened. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message INVALID ’DATA BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Bit Length’ in the text file is invalid. L:E–3501 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT ERROR The number of input parameters is invalid. For details. L:E–3338 INVALID ’X PARAMETER’ IN TEXT FILE ’X Parameter’ in the text file is invalid. Contents L:E–3337 INVALID ’STEP BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Stop Bit’ in the text file is invalid. L:E–3401 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS DIFFERENT. Specify Format–C source program. L:E–3353 PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT) L:E–3354 PORT ERROR (TIME OUT) L:E–3355 PORT ERROR (DATA OUTPUT) L:E–3356 TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR The system timer is invalid. Specified source program’s PMC type is unknown. INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.DAT). w L:E–3502 L:E–3504 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read. File xxxx does not exist. L:E–3341 TEMPORARY FILE FORMAT ERROR The temporary file format is invalid.4. L:E–3339 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed. L:E–3500 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. – Unpermitted character is used in specified program name. L:E–3507 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid. L:E–3508 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.DAT. 267 . L:E–3506 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN ERROR The destination file for source file conversion cannot be opened. L:E–3345 PORT INITIALIZE ERROR Port initialization failed. L:E–3350 PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).c om Number L:E–3336 A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). L:E–3352 PORT ERROR(FRAMING) A framing error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). L:E–3403 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. L:E–3351 PORT ERROR(PARTY) A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). L:E–3607 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid. L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. L:E–3515 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.c om L:E–3511 L:E–3512 SUM CHECK ERROR OF S RECORD The S record check sum is erroneous. L:E–3703 NO. L:E–3612 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid. L:E–3700 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER An error occurred during memory card format conversion. L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing. L:E–3701 NO. L:E–3702 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. File xxxx does not exist.c nc ce nt e r. L:E–3621 FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD The S record format is invalid. L:E–3606 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN ERROR The destination file cannot be opened. w L:E–3619 268 . L:E–3600 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. L:E–3608 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents L:E–3510 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ ERROR The source file cannot be read. L:E–3618 FORMAT ERROR OF S0 RECORD The S0 record format is invalid. MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing. L:E–3513 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the destination file. L:E–3605 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN ERROR The source file cannot be opened. L:E–3601 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT ERROR The number of input parameters is invalid. w . CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid. L:E–3610 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ ERROR The source file cannot be read.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. L:E–3602 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid. L:E–3609 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid. L:E–3620 DATA CONVERT ERROR A data conversion error occurred. L:E–3614 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist. L:E–3604 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read. L:E–3615 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled. L:E–3613 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the destination file. w L:E–3617 PMC TYPE CODE ERROR The machine model code for the S0 record is invalid. L:E–3622 PMC ADDRESS ERROR The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range.4. L:E–3514 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist. L:E–3603 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened. L:E–3611 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing. w w w . ce nt e r. L:E–3731 DATA MAX OVER The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum. L:E–3713 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created. L:E–3729 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file. L:E–3720 FILE SEEK ERROR L:E–3721 FILE READ ERROR L:E–3722 FILE OPEN ERROR L:E–3723 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does not exist. L:E–3707 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read. L:E–3732 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM SIZE Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than that of the count. L:E–3736 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid. L:E–3730 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file. L:E–3708 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized. L:E–3712 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Message Contents INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that supports memory card format conversion. L:E–3709 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.4. L:E–3716 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file. 269 . The specified file cannot be read. L:E–3726 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed. L:E–3735 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid. L:E–3706 INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF FILE SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range).c nc The specified file cannot be opened. L:E–3711 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion. L:E–3705 INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range). L:E–3710 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read. L:E–3728 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section. L:E–3724 INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF ROM SIZE) The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). L:E–3727 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section. L:E–3715 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card format conversion. A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file. L:E–3714 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened. L:E–3719 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid. L:E–3725 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be determined. L:E–3734 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid). L:E–3737 PARAMETER ERROR (MEMORY CARD TYPE) There is an invalid parameter (memory card format). L:E–3717 BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE L:E–3718 IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed. L:E–3733 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY CARD The size of the memory card data section is invalid.c om L:E–3704 The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation. L:W–4207 ∗ ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE (XXXX BYTE) The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.c nc ce nt e r.12. Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is not same. L:W–4200 ∗ NORMAL END Processing ended normally.c om L:W–4100 270 .2 Warning Number Message Contents ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE. L:W–4206 ∗ ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO ROM COUNT SIZE The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size. L:W–4202 ∗ PARITY UNMATCH The parity does not match. L:W–4203 ∗ CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX Cassette size = xxxx L:W–4204 ∗ ROM COUNT = XXXX ROM count = xxxx L:W–4205 ∗ THE LAST 120H BYTES OF THE OBJECT FILE ARE DELETED The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted. CONTINUE TO TRANSFER? (Y/N) L:W–4101 ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE L:W–4102 XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT PMC TYPE. L:W–4201 ∗ D _PROGOPT _DRAM UNMATCH The DRAM does not match. w w w .4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. Start communication with the PMC. Replace the F–ROM. Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid. Try using the off–line CONDENSE function. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid. Reduce the size of the sequence program. N:E–3045 LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC. Load. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 4. Communication with the PMC has not been established. Contact FANUC Service. N:E–3037 PMC TYPE UNMATCH. Reduce the size of the ladder program. N:E–3046 THE PROGRAM IS NOT CORRESPONDING (PMC). N:E–3050 INPUT INVALID An invalid value has been entered. N:E–3042 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. N:E–3031 PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RA1). Clear the cause of the PMC alarm. N:E–3041 THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS NOT READY.4. N:E–3036 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION). Reduce the size of the ladder program. N:E–3008 FLASH ROM PROGRAM DATA ERROR The PMC sequence program has failed. or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program. ce nt e r. When the PMC control module type is RA1. STATUS=NN The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. The size of the sequence program exceeds the option–specified size. Convert the machine model using the off–line function. Load. Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid. store. N:E–3007 FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop status. N:E–3055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional instruction is invalid. N:E–3006 FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program is greater than that of F–ROM.13.c N:E–3001 w w w . Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm. The ladder step number option does not exist.c nc The PMC type is invalid. Input the sequence program again. Increase the size of F–ROM. on–line editing cannot be performed. Check the size of the sequence program. N:E–3047 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC ERROR STATUS = nn Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued. store. or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program.1 Error Message Contents om Number FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR N:E–3003 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F–ROM is faulty. N:E–3048 LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. N:E–3030 LADDER SIZE ERROR The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC. 271 . N:E–3051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program is full. Enter a valid value. N:E–3038 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP).13 N : ON–LINE MONITOR 4. Set the CNC to emergency stop status. N:E–3054 COM FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the COM (SUB9) functional instruction is invalid. 272 .4. Or. Input the ladder program again. Specify another subprogram number. N:E–3069 LBL NO. N:E–3073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does not exist. N:E–3077 SYMBOL UNDEFINE The entered symbol is not yet defined. N:E–3061 COM FUNCTION MISSING (CALL. enter the JMPC functional instruction. N:E–3062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP) Within the subprogram. Enter a valid symbol name. DUPLICATE The specified subprogram number already exists. N:E–3065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING No subprogram exists. Reduce the number of labels. N:E–3080 LADDER ILLEGAL The ladder program is invalid. together with JMPB. Input the ladder program again.SP) The CALL or CALLU functional instruction is specified between the COM (SUB9) and COME functional instructions. ce nt e r.c nc The specified label number is already in use. or in a subprogram. Enter the END functional instruction. Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladder level. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid. Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME. END3. ERROR MESSAGE LIST Number B–62884EN/01 Message Contents END FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the END1. Enter the LBL functional instruction. Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correct order. END2. N:E–3072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING The JMPB instruction cannot jump to other than a subprogram. Specify another label number.c om N:E–3056 w w w . Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Enter the LBL functional instruction. N:E–3060 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid. N:E–3068 LBL COUNT OVER The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum. Enter these instructions in the second ladder level. N:E–3076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists in a level other than the second ladder level. Create a subprogram. N:E–3064 SP NO. Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. N:E–3075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than a subprogram. N:E–3071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB) The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM and COME functional instructions. Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram. N:E–3074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) The specified LBL functional instruction is specified between COM and COME. the usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional instruction is invalid. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and COME. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and COME. enter the LBL functional instruction. Or. N:E–3063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid. N:E–3058 LADDER BROKEN Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed. and END functional instructions is invalid. N:E–3066 END FUNCTION NOTHING The END functional instruction does not exist. between COM and COME. Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram. Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid. DUPLICATE N:E–3070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does not exist. together with LBL. between COM and COME. Reduce the size of the net being edited. Connect the horizontal lines. Add a relay or coil. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. N:E–3090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil exists. Connect the vertical lines. An invalid net exists.. Alternatively. N:E–3084 DATA TABLE COUNT OVER The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum. N:E–3131 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn Data cannot be written to the MCARD file. N:E–3096 PARAMETER NOTHING N:E–3097 ADDRESS NOT DETECTED No address is specified. ROM FILE READ ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn The MCARD file cannot be read. N:E–3085 EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed. N:E–3114 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO Search for a functional instruction has been performed using the wrong number. Reboot the personal computer. Reduce the size of the net being edited. Reduce the number of data tables. Check the number of the functional instruction. The net is too large to be displayed. an attempt was made to create a relay or coil in a functional instruction).4. N:E–3100 NET TOO LARGE The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer. the MCARD file may have been destroyed. Correct the invalid net. nc . N:E–3123 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn The MCARD file cannot be opened. Reboot the personal computer. and the name of the program to be saved. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Message Contents ILLEGAL OPERATION An invalid operation was performed (e. N:E–3126 ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) ERROR STATUS = nn An error occurred when reading data from extended memory. Delete the unnecessary relay or coil. N:E–3095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL The vertical lines of the net are not connected. N:E–3102 LARGE NET APPEARED N:E–3111 ERROR NET FOUND N:E–3113 FUNCTION NOT FOUND The specified functional instruction is not found. N:E–3130 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR NOT ENOUGH MEMORY There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file.c w w N:E–3124 om N:E–3082 273 . Specify an address. N:E–3092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal lines of the net are not connected. w N:E–3125 r. Check the number specified for the functional instruction. Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are specified correctly. Be careful to specify operations correctly. N:E–3094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING No relay or coil exists. Specify the required parameters. The MCARD file may have been destroyed.g. SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn The symbol file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Check the specified address. the source program may have been destroyed. N:E–3093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL There is an invalid connection between functional instructions. Reduce the size of the net. Alternatively. Memory management may have been disabled. Check the amount of free space available on disk. N:E–3091 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The specified address is not found.c ce nt e No parameters are specified for a functional instruction. Memory management may have been disabled. Alternatively. If the program does not match that in PMC memory. load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program. An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group. N:E–3153 TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR. Correct the error in the diagram. or on disk. The system cannot switch to update or monitor. An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC. w w The user has canceled the transfer. If the storing of a program is canceled. Reserve an area in extended memory. but that data table group is write–protected. N:E–3144 ADDRESS NOT FOUND. N:E–3163 MISMATCH PASSWORD The entered password is invalid. If program loading is canceled. N:E–3155 PROGRAM READ ERROR. Reserve an area in conventional memory. There is insufficient memory. N:E–3141 FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC. then set that data table group to write–enabled status. N:E–3161 TRANSFER WAS ABORTED. First. N:E–3171 CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION ERROR. Check whether the address is specified correctly.c om Number N:E–3132 . the source program may have been destroyed. N:E–3170 CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER. Update the ladder diagram. NOT ENOUGH PMC’S PROGRAM MEMORY The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program memory. w nc The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder diagram has been modified. The program name is invalid. Check the program name. Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk. N:E–3150 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT BEEN MODIFIED. N:E–3142 FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. The specified range is too great.4. Contents N:E–3140 FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Store the program again to load it into the PMC. Enter a valid password. the program in PMC memory may be destroyed. 274 . An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram when it had not been modified. N:E–3164 TOO LARGE PROGRAM. NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM MEMORY There is insufficient memory. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn The net comment file cannot be opened. conventional memory. N:E–3160 SELECTED PROGRAM IS UNMATCH. N:E–3143 THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS WRITE–PROTECTED.c N:E–3162 NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. ce nt e r. Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. An error occurred in the ladder diagram. Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC program memory. check whether the correct data table group is specified. Reserve an area in conventional memory. Set up communication with the PMC. An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC. N:E–3151 AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM. NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM MEMORY There is insufficient memory. N:E–3167 INVALID PROGRAM NAME. The specified address is not found. or load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program. N:E–3158 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN MODIFIED. CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM. There is insufficient memory. Specify the correct program. The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory. Specify a narrower range. the program remains as is. or set KEY4=1. When nn = –2: The net comment file contains invalid data. N:E–3178 NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA. w w w . conventional memory. Set CNC parameter PWE=1. N:E–3186 WRITE PROTECT. The net comment file contains erroneous data. (CHECK PWE AND KEY4.) PMC parameter is write protected. Check the net comments using the off–line function. N:E–3187 WRITE PROTECT. Set CNC parameter PWE=1. Reserve an area in extended memory. When nn = –1: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory.c nc ce nt e r. or on disk. or stop the sequence program. – Data table control data screen is protected. Confirm keep relay. Confirm keep relay. Check the net comments using the off–line function. Signal status is write protected. – On-line editing function and I/O menu functions are protected. The net comment file contains no net comment within the specified range. When nn = –1: There is insufficient memory. Check the net comments using the off–line function.c om Number N:E–3172 275 . NOR EMERGENCY STOP. Check the net comments using the off–line function.4. (NOT MDI MODE PMC parameter is write protected.) Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Message Contents NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn). N:E–3175 NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. or stop the sequence program. Check the net comments using the off–line function. N:E–3184 WRITE PROTECT. N:E–3177 NET COMMENT DATA WRITE ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data. N:E–3174 NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR (nn). or on disk. When nn = –2: The net comment file contains invalid data.) PMC parameter is write protected. conventional memory. (CHECK PWE. Reserve an area in extended memory. N:E–3185 WRITE PROTECT. or on disk. N:E–3176 NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. N:E–3183 THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED. N:E–3173 NET COMMENT COPY ERROR (nn). Check the net comments using the off–line function. conventional memory. When nn = –2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Confirm keep relay. The net comment file contains erroneous data. or stop the sequence program. When nn = –1: There is insufficient memory. Check the net comments using the off–line function. [Remedy] A hard error may occur. N:E–3321 PMC parameter file read error. c) Whether disk format is right. [Remedy] Please secure the disk space. [Remedy] Please secure an extended memory. N:E–3312 Signal analysis is executing.c w PMC parameter file write error. N:E–3325 PMC parameter file write error. a) Whether drive is ready. N:E–3320 PMC parameter file read error. conventional memory. w w N:E–3322 om N:E–3300 N:E–3323 PMC parameter file write error. File is write protected. Signal trace cannot be executed [Cause] Signal trace cannot be executed because signal analysis is executing on PMC. and the disk space. [Cause] Fail in writing the PMC parameter file. N:E–3302 Reject signal trigger [Cause] Online editor is selected. [Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Contents Signal trigger unavailable [Cause] Trigger data on PMC side is invalid. [Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal trigger parameter. [Cause] Insufficient disk space. [Remedy] Please re–start signal trace after signal analysis was finished. b) Whether disk is not write–protected.4. Cannot execute signal trigger [Cause] Signal trigger cannot be executed because debug ladder is executing on PMC side. N:E–3324 PMC parameter file write error. Please confirm following cases. a) Whether drive is ready.c ce nt e nc . N:E–3304 Signal trigger buffer size error [Cause] The memory buffer for signal trigger on PMC side is insufficient. [Remedy] A hard error may occur. [Cause] The file is write–protected. [Remedy] Please confirm the address of signal trace parameter. [Cause] The specified file is not found. Specified path not found. [Remedy] Please cancel the write–protect. N:E–3305 Signal trigger data unavail [Cause] Signal trigger parameter is not corrected. Please confirm following cases. [Cause] The specified path is not found. [Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct. [Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after online editor was finished. [Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after debug ladder was finished. 276 . N:E–3311 Signal trace parameter error [Cause] Signal trace parameter is not corrected . Insufficient disk space. r. [Cause] Fail in reading the PMC parameter file. Specified file not found. N:E–3301 Signal trigger buffer allocation error [Cause] The memory is insufficient. N:E–3303 Debug ladder is executing. b) Whether disk format is right. [Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct. [Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC. N:E–3310 Signal trace is unavailable [Cause] Signal trace is not supported on PMC side. [Remedy] Please stop the ladder program. [Remedy] Please put NC into the state of emergency stop and set Parameter Write Enable (PWE) ”1”. Signal trigger is executing [Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing. w N:E–3348 Ladder debug parameter error. N:E–3327 This file format is not PMC parameter file format. N:E–3341 Step cannot be executed. Or. please stop the Ladder. Min=1 Max=32767) [Cause] In ladder debug parameter. [Remedy] Please confirm trigger count or scan count. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function. N:E–3345 Trigger cannot be executed. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function. Ladder program is running [Cause] Step cannot be executed because the ladder program is running. [Remedy] Please confirm the file name. [Remedy] Please confirm whether the file format is correct. N:E–3351 Block execution aborted ! [Cause] Block execution is aborted by the following operations. Or.c om N:E–3326 Scan cannot be executed. N:E–3344 Block cannot be executed.) [Cause] PMC parameter file can not be restored if NC is not stopping emergency or Parameter Write Enable (PWE) is not ”1” while Ladder is running. N:E–3346 Scan cannot be executed. N:E–3343 Step cannot be executed. [Remedy] Please stop the ladder program. w N:E–3349 N:E–3350 Ladder debug parameter error. [Remedy] Please put NC into EDIT mode.(Not EDIT mode. Ladder program is running [Cause] Scan cannot be executed because the ladder program is running. [Remedy] Please stop the ladder program. Signal trigger is executing [Cause] Block cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing. Signal trigger is executing [Cause] Step cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.) [Cause] PMC parameter file can not be saved if NC is not EDIT mode while Ladder is running. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Contents Illegal PMC parameter file name.c nc ce nt e r. – Select Online editor – Run the ladder program – Enter or exit online monitor 277 . (Address %s?) [Cause] In ladder debug parameter. N:E–3342 Block cannot be executed. N:E–3347 Trigger cannot be executed. [Cause] The mistake is found in the file name. w . [Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.4. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.(Not emergency stop nor PWE = ”1”. [Cause] There is a part of illegal format in the PMC parameter file. Ladder program is running [Cause] Block cannot be executed because the ladder program is running. trigger count or scan count is not correct. [Remedy] Please confirm trigger address. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function. trigger address is not correct. (Count %s?. N:E–3328 Can not save. Ladder program is running [Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because the ladder program is running. Signal trigger is executing [Cause] Scan cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing. please stop the Ladder. N:E–3329 Can not restore. Cannot execute signal analysis [Cause] Signal analysis cannot be executed because signal trace is executing on PMC side. Debug trigger is executing [Cause] Trigger count cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing. N:E–3374 Aborted signal analysis execution and initialize ? [Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side by the keep memory data of the old edition. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of scan.4. w w w . N:E–3354 Count cannot be changed. [Remedy] Please re–try parameter initialized after signal analyz was finished. N:E–3372 Signal trace is executing.c nc ce nt e r. Debug scan is executing [Cause] Scan count cannot be changed because scan is executing. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01 Number Contents Address cannot be changed. N:E–3373 Disable init for sampling [Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side. N:E–3371 Signal analysis parameter error [Cause] Signal analysis parameter is not corrected.c om N:E–3352 278 . Debug trigger is executing [Cause] Trigger address cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing. [Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal analysis parameter. N:E–3370 Signal analysis is unavailable [Cause] Signal analysis not supports on PMC side. [Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger. N:E–3353 Count cannot be changed. [Remedy] Please re–start signal analysis after signal trace was finished. [Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger. r.c w w w om APPENDIX .c ce nt e nc . 2.A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS w w w . 281 .2. Read this appendix in conjunction with Section 1.c nc ce nt e r.c om Those functions which vary depending on the PMC model are described below. For a detailed explanation of editing. see Section 3. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 A.6.c 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) om (1) PMC–RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 ce nt e PMC TYPE = RB3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END (2) PMC–RC3/RC4 EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) PMC–RC4 . 1:YES) r.1 The system parameter editing screens for all of the PMC models are shown below.A. 1:BCD) (1–150%) (0–99%) (0:NO. Editing EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) COUNTER DATA TYPE (UNUSED) (UNUSED) (UNUSED) OPERATOR PANEL KEY ADDRESS LED ADDRESS KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] : : : : : : 0 (0:BINARY. 1:YES) 1 2 3 w w w PMC TYPE = RC4 282 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END .c nc 1) COUNTER DATA TYPE 2) LADDER EXEC 3) (UNUSED) 4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO 5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN 6) OPERATOR PANEL 7) KEY ADDRESS 8) LED ADDRESS 9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS 10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥] : : 0 100% : : : : : : : 50% 000000H 0 (0:BINARY.1.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS A.5.2. 1:BCD) 0 (0:NO. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 A. 3. specify the KEY address. and LED image address as follows: .5. 7. NO: Not used) (PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) / PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6 (STEP SEQ) ) r. om %@0↓ 2 BINARY↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC – RB4↓ %↓ [EOB] When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used). LED address. 6. 4. For information about the mnemonic editing function. 3. KEY image address. LED address. specify the KEY address. ce nt e (2) PMC–RB3 Note (Binary or BCD) (YES: Used. 5. 7.c 3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓ w (3) PMC–RC3/RC4 w w %@0↓ 2 BCD↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC – RC4↓ 5 000000 6 50↓ 7 100↓ %↓ [EOB] Note 2.8. Counter data type Whether an operator’s panel is used PMC model (Binary or BCD) (YES: Used.c Note 2. see Section 3. 3.1. LED address. NO: Not used) (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4 (STEPSEQ)) Start address of language program link control statement data (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal)) Percentage of language program execution time (1% to 99%) Ladder execution time (Always 100%) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used). KEY image address. and LED image address as follows: 3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓ 283 . 4. 4. and LED image address as follows: 3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓ %@0↓ 2 BINARY↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC – RB3↓ 7 100↓ %↓ [EOB] Counter data type Whether an operator’s panel is used PMC model Ladder execution time (Binary or BCD) (YES: Used. (1) PMC–RB4/RB5/RB6 Counter data type Whether an operator’s panel is used PMC model When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used). KEY image address.2 Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format) The system parameter mnemonic formats for the PMC models are shown below.A. NO: Not used) (PMC-RB3) (100% (fixed)) nc 2. specify the KEY address. LINK ROM format file ROM format file Transferred to the ROM writers and PMC om Link Load modules in C language ce nt e r.c FANUC distribution library BND386 (binder) w BLD386 (binder) Link OJ386 (converter) w w Intel hexadecimal load module Convert (Note 2) ROM format file Object file with C language (MCARD file) HEX2SREC (Note 1) PMC – RC3 Debug ROM writer 284 . FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS A.A. C program development environment for PMC-RC (/RC3/RC4/QC/NB) Personal computer Link control statement creation tool FAPT LADDER C language source Link control source nc Convert (Note 2) Object file (MCARD file) iC286 (compiler) ROM format file . an object and C language load modules can be separately transferred to and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).c Notes This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer. The C language can be used only with PMC-RC3/RC4/RC4 (STEP SEQ)/QC/NB/NB2. Linking is not required when the C language is not used. In addition. load modules created in the C language are linked with a ROM format file.2 B–62884EN/01 During linking. with this function. ” The specification of the following files has the same effect in input/output: HEX2SREC SAMPLE. the extension “.SR HEX2SREC SAMPLE.6. Output is directed to a file with the same name but the extension is changed to ”.c nc Note When the extension of an input file name is omitted. in the case of link processing. Specify as follows: input-file-name output-file-name ce nt e C:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEX2SREC 2) Conversion is performed.6. 3) Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command. · Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARD file) to a ROM format file · After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to an object file (MCARD file) For the method of conversion. 2 With FAPT LADDER-II. [Operation] 1) Execute HEX2SREC. This means that a ROM format file cannot be created by compile processing alone.HEX HEX2SREC SAMPLE (b) Converting between an object file and ROM format file A ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program. Instead.HEX” is assumed. convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC User’s Manual.5.SR.SR HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAMPLE. A detailed description is given below. w w w . ROM format files are no longer used. Before link operation. conversion between an object file and ROM format file being required. see 3. r. 285 . 4) Specify an output file name (for example.SR) as the load module file name for linking.c (a) Using method of HEX2SREC Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be directly linked.HEX SAMPLE. SAMPLE. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 om Notes 1 Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be linked.A. the following extra work is required. Perform the below operation before linking.EXE in response to the DOS prompt. c Specify the model to be used for link processing. Pressing the Enter EXEC FILE NAME i _lipmcr – p fl03400.SR : A:¥DATA¥SAMPLE. In such a case. the pop-up screen shown below appears. · When the specified model file is not installed → Install the model file. The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMC models and model file names. w w w . ce nt e PMC model PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) Model file name fl03400.c Series NC & PMC name <0>[A:¥FLADDER¥] 1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 P 5I 6 7 8 9 10 END Note If an invalid model file is specified.#EX Edition Machine tool name Program no. tbl ↑ om key displays the link screen. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 (c) Starting link processing [Operation] 1) Press on the utility screen.tbl fl04200. Linker PMC–RC3 nc Load module file name ROM format file name : A:¥DATA¥C–MODULE. by changing the model file name. the status line of the link screen does not display a model name. 286 . check the following: · When the newly entered file name is invalid → Enter a valid file name.A.tbl fl04000. F4 2) Then. Model file name r.tbl (Initial value) 3) The link screen appears. c nc ce nt e r. Here the load module file name should be specified with its extension (--------. The load module file name must conform to DOS specifications. w w w . 2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen. 287 . (Specity an output program name for HEX2SREC. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01 (d) Linking [Operation] 1) Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link.***).c om (4) Termination [Operation] 1) Select [END].) 2) Select [EXEC].A. or once processing has been terminated after modifying the ladder program by using the on–line function.c nc ce nt e r. 2) MCARD file The MCARD file is updated once the source program has been input by using the off–line input/output function (for example.B.c om B B–62884EN/01 288 . automatic compilation or decompilation is performed according to the following conditions: [Conditions/results] The start conditions are determined from the results of comparing the time stamps of the CONTROL and MCARD files for the source program. after being transferred from the PMC or converted from a memory–card or Handy–File format file). [Applicable cases] D When compilation is performed after the program is edited by using the off–line function D etc w w w . [Applicable cases] D When no compilation is performed after the program is edited by using the off–line function D etc 2) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp → Automatic decompilation is performed. [File updating conditions] 1) CONTROL file The CONTROL file is updated once the source program has been modified by using the off–line editing function. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION (1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilation When [ON–LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selected from the initial menu. [Results] 1) When the CONTROL file has the most recent time stamp → Automatic compilation is performed. The conditions under which these files are updated and the results of updating are described below. [Applicable cases] D When no decompilation is performed after the program is transferred from the PMC by using the off–line input/output function D When processing is terminated after the ladder program is edited by using the on–line function D etc 3) When both files have the same time stamp → Automatic start processing is not performed. B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B–62884EN/01 w w w .c nc ce nt e r.c om Note The options applied to automatic compilation or decompilation, started under the above conditions, are those specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of the off–line function. Before attempting to select [ON–LINE FUNCTION], confirm the set options. For details of how to set options, see Section 4.5.7. 289 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE w w w .c nc ce nt e r.c om C B–62884EN/01 290 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01 C.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET. CNF” “%%%FLSET.CNF” is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior of system is decided, are described there. The file exits in the directory in which the system is installed. And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market. r.c (1) Sample of “%%%FLSET.CNF” om Note %%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used to determine system operation. If data in this file is not modified correctly, the functions described in this manual may not be performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attempt to modify any data other than the items described below. ; ; FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File ; ; ; *V; System information ; verl=A08B–9201–J503 Version 01.0; rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991–1995 FANUC LTD.; *S; System Setup ; editor =; ; ladkey = 1; ; ; IEC_SYM=2 ; ; *U; Utility Information ; N = UTILITY; ; F1 = Dos / command.com; F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr–pf103400b.tbl; F5 =; F6 =; F7 =; F8 =; F9 =; F10=; ; [EOF] ce nt e ( ‘key word =’ ⇐ 9characters) .c nc Text Editor Ladder editing key buffer size (1 ⇐ ladkey ⇐ 16) 1:Check symbol (level–1) for IEC standard 2:No check w Utility Guidance w w [F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F2] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F3] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F4] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F5] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F6] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F7] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F8] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F9] Soft Key Guidance & EXE [F10] Soft Key Guidance & EXE 291 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01 om (2) Registering a command in the utility (a) Function A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the [UTILITY] function on the initial or off–line menu. (b) Key word Items “F5=” to “F10=” are displayed under Utility Information “ *U ; ” For these items, describe the tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify currently displayed characters, such as *U and F5=. If such a character is modified, the system does not recognize the assignment. (c) Format Tool name displayed on the utility screen Characters to the right of ; are assumed to be a comment. [F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE F1 = Dos / command. com ; ! r.c Registered tool Delimiter between displayed name and command Function key to which the tool is assigned w w w .c nc ce nt e The maximum number of characters which can be used to specify the tool name and registered tool are as follows: D Tool name : 70 characters (or 35 double–byte characters) D Registered tool : 40 characters 292 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 w w w .c nc ce nt e r.c om D CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM 293 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM D.1 DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER B–62884EN/01 (1) Source program types FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMAT–A, FORMAT–B, and FORMAT–C, while FAPT LADDER–II Ladder Editing Package supports only the FORMAT–C type. Supported source program type Software model FORMAT–B FORMAT–C f (NOTE) f (NOTE) f (NOTE) FAPT LADDER–II f Ladder Editing Package f FAPT LADDER om FORMAT–A r.c Note The supported source program types also vary with the PMC model. For details, refer to the relevant FAPT LADDER manual. ce nt e SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT–C 1) FORMAT–C This source program type is used on Ladder Editing Package. The FORMAT–C source program is organized by below files. <A case of specifying “C:¥DATA¥PRG_C” as source program> C:¥ data¥ PRG _C¥ w w w .c nc S S S S S S S S S S S S S S CONTROL SYSPARAM TITLE XSYMBOL.xxx MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVEL1.#LA LEVEL2.#LA LEVEL3.#LA Pyyy.#LA Pzzz.#SS NETCMT.xxx OPTION MCARD Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file⋅ Symbol & Comment data file Message data file I/O Module data file First level ladder data file Second level ladder data file Third level ladder data file Sub–program ladder data file Sub–program step sequence data file Net comment data file Setting of option Memory card format file (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 1) Notes 1 ’xxx’ is number of multi file managing. 2 Only for use LEVEL3 ladder. 3 ’yyy’, ’zzz’ is number of sub–program. 2) FORMAT–A This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER. The source program is managed using the following names. A single directory can contain two or more source programs. 294 ) CONTROL SYSPARAM TITLE SYMBOL COMMENT1 COMMENT2 MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVEL1.#LA LEVEL2. FAPT LADDER–II.#C1 xxxxxxxx.#LA Pyyyyy. however. does not use ROM format files because an object file called an MCARD file (memory–card format file) is added to the source program. w (a) FAPT LADDER FAPT LADDER Source file 1) → ← 2) 1) Compile 3) Output (in ROM format) ROM format file 3) → ← 4) 2) Decompile 4) Input (in ROM format) 295 External devices CNC Memory–card format file Handy–File format file .#IO xxxxxxxx. The data flow is outlined below.#LA : File managing user programs : File storing system parameters : File storing the title data : File storing symbols : File storing comments : File storing comments (reserve) : File storing messages : File storing the I/O module data : File storing ladder om (xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.c 3) FORMAT–B This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.#TA xxxxxxxx.#CN xxxxxxxx.c (2) Elimination of ROM format files FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files.#C2 xxxxxxxx. Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of ROM format files.#PA xxxxxxxx. In the directory. does not require the input of ROM format files. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 xxxxxxxx.D.) w w . A directory is created with the specified source program name. FAPT LADDER–II.#SY xxxxxxxx. (yyyyy is a subprogram number.#ME xxxxxxxx.#SS : File managing the source program : File storing system parameters : File storing the title data : File storing symbols : File storing comments : File storing comments (reserve) : File storing messages : File storing the I/O module data : File storing ladder of the first level : File storing ladder of the second level : File storing ladder of the third level : File storing ladder subprograms : File storing step sequence subprograms nc ce nt e r. the program is managed under the following names. Ladder Editing Package. however. A single directory cannot contain two or more source programs.#LA Pyyyyy.#LA LEVEL3. c 1) Compile 3) Output (in object format) External devices CNC Memory–card format file Handy–File format file om (b) B–62884EN/01 296 .c nc ce nt e r. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM FAPT LADDER–II/Ladder Editing Package FAPT LADDER–II Source file Each data file 1) → ← 2) 3) MCARD file 4) 2) Decompile 4) Input (in object format) w w w .D. use a method that is appropriate for the data format. For details of the function. 297 .D. apply method (3). see Section 3. see Section 3.8.5.6. however.6. as described below.5. that this method cannot be used to convert a step sequence program. see Section 3. perform program conversion as explained in (a). allowing this method to be used for conversion. w w w .6. above.8.5. Note. Then. For details of this function. using the FAPT LADDER I/O function of “Memory card. see Section 3.3. ce nt e (2) Conversion using a mnemonic format file Convert a program to a mnemonic format file. [Data types] – Source file of FORMAT–C – Source file of FORMAT–A and –B – Mnemonic format file – Memory–card format file – ROM format file r.” before using the program.2 om CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER When converting data created with FAPT LADDER for use with the Ladder Editing Package. above. (b) FORMAT–A/B First. All FAPT LADDER–II source files are of FORMAT–C type.5. For details of the function. using the mnemonic editing function of FAPT LADDER. created with a FAPT LADDER function such as the compile function.6.6. (See Section 3.5.) (3) Conversion using a memory–card format file Convert a program to a memory–card format file. convert a ROM format file. convert a file of to FORMAT–C type. to a memory–card format file by using the I/O function of “ROM format file. using FAPT LADDER. before using the program.5.c nc (4) Conversion using a ROM format file First. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D.” Then.c (1) Source file conversion (with the backup function) (a) FORMAT–C A file can be converted with the “Restore” of the backup function. For details of this function. RB/RB2/RB3 RC3/RC4 RB4/RB5/RB6 RC/RC3/RC4 PMC-PA1/PA3/NB/NB2 ce nt e [Example: PMC–RB3 → PMC–RC3] (1) Set the PMC type to PMC–RB3 and convert the original source program to mnemonic file. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM D. However.c PMC-RA1/RA2/RA3 Step sequence data → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 cannot be converted. Converted file (PMC–RC3) nc Original file (PMC–RB3) Change system parameter w w w . it is possible to edit the different PMC type data by changing system parameter of the mnemonic data. On the following PMC type. it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to another type of it.1 Converting by System Parameter Editing By changing the mnemonic file. usable functional instructions and range of address are different.3.3 B–62884EN/01 Conversion destination (PMC) Remarks r. (3) Convert the mnemonic file(→(2)) to source program by the open CNC of PMC–RC3 model.D. Conversion source (PMC) om D. format of the system parameter. (2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMC–RC3 with a standard text editor.c %@A %@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC–RB3 7 100 % %@1 01 ABC–KIKAI 02 S–DRILL % %@5 X000 1 0 1 ID16C Y008 1 0 4 OD32A % %@E %@A %@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC–RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 % %@1 01 ABC–KIKAI 02 S–DRILL % %@5 X000 1 0 1 ID16C Y008 1 0 4 OD32A % %@E 298 . (→ A. to a source program.) (Specify the name of the mnemonic file created in (2) as the edit file name. w w w (8) On the symbol editing screen.) nc (5) Replace the ladder data of the conversion destination mnemonic file (PMC–RB4) with the ladder data of the conversion source mnemonic file (PMC–M).) (3) Start your text editor (any commercially available text editor can be used. 299 .2 Conversion source (PMC) Conversion destination (PMC) Converter file name PMC-L/M/M (FS0-T) (MMC) → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0T_CNV.D. (→ D. then start the Ladder Editing Package. . 5).) (4) Replace the symbol data of the conversion destination mnemonic file (PMC–RB4) with the converter file (FS0T_CNV.SYM).SYM RC3/RC4 PMC-L/M/M (FS0-M) (MMC) → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0M_CNV. then convert the program subject to conversion to a mnemonic file.c Note A converter file is included under the APPENDIX subdirectory on the system floppy disk (Vol.c (7) Convert the mnemonic format file created in (5). (→ C. [Example operation: PMC–M → PMC–RB4] (1) Set FAPT LADDER for PMC–M. (→ B.3. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D. delete all symbol and comment data.SYM RC3/RC4 om Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter r.) (6) Terminate the text editor. above. convert the source program to a mnemonic file with the off–line function for “MNEMONIC EDIT”.) ce nt e (2) On the OPEN CNC of the PMC–RB4 model. Insertion w w w .2 F0135.3 WRT.5 F0135.1 G100.5 F275.0 G100.D.c D.1 G0000. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM %@A %@0 1 400 20 Converter file (FS0T_CNV.c nc ce nt e r.6 F275. NOT X22.2 G100.4 F0135.3 SUB 1 SUB 2 % %@4 % %@E B. Conversion destination mnemonic format file (PMC–RB4) C.7 % 7 100 80 90 %@1 % %@2 % %@3 RD X21.7 F275.4 F275.SYM) %@2 G0000.Insertion %@A %@0 2 BINARY 3 NO 4 PMC–RB4 %@1 % %@2 % %@3 % %@4 % %@5 % %@E om A.4 WRT G121.4 RD. Conversion source mnemonic format file (PMC–M) B–62884EN/01 300 . NOT G122.0 G0000.6 F0135. c %@A %@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC–RB 7 100 9 YES % %@1 Insert %@2 X0000. message.0 ZPX.1 ZPY. om [Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC–RB for the PMC–RC3] %@A %@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC–RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 % %@1 %@2 X000 .D. by the following method.1 ZPY. They may have to be modified. M X0001.c nc % %@E 301 . and I/O module data) in a sequence program can be used for another sequence program. Refer to the programming manual of the respective models. M % % %@E ce nt e r. The range of addresses used varies from one model to another.0 ZPX. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D. M X0001. M % w w w .3. symbol & comment.3 Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program Data (such as title. ladder. the following message is displayed. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D.1 FLOADAT [name of file for storing uploaded data] –u (for IBM PC/AT) ce nt e When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data already exists in the current directory. w w w . (1) Uploading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P–G via the RS–232–C port. Note The above parameters can be specified with either lowercase or uppercase characters.4 TRANSFER FROM P–G D. File is exist.D.c D.4. the load commands have the following two parameters: –u: Uploads data from the P–G to the PC.c FLOADAT 302 .1 Command Input During Startup om Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and PC This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P–G (including the Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS–232–C cable. –d: Downloads data from the PC to the P–G. [name of file for storing downloaded data] –d (for IBM PC/AT) As shown above.1. [FLOADAT] is for IBM PC/AT.4. r. Over write? <Y/N> nc (2) Downloading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P–G from the PC via the RS–232–C port. FLOADAT FILENAME –u w . nc <PC> <PG> Example of input and screen contents Enter IO command settings. note that when the PC baud rate is set to 9600.E.2 PC side IBM PC/AT series MODE COM1: (PC DOS MODE MODE COM1: command) P–G side IO NC. Hit any key to end operation. Operation example During uploading Operation procedure Turn on power.7. w <PG> <PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed. <PC> “Operation Complete” is displayed. the parameter BR10 must be added to the baud rate setting for the P–G. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D. 303 “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed. The CN number is not fixed. Enters waiting state. the CN number can be any setting from CN1 to CN3.2 9600. w Begins transmission.c <PG> <PG> Set [F6] ON. <PC> Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu. <PC> Execute FLOADAT.F6 IO NC. please restore the communications settings as the section 2.BR10 (for 9600 baud) Communications Settings 4800. Use the cables specified in Appendix H. 2 It is necessary to set these communications setting only for doing this operation.2. However.F1. Press the [F2] key to select menu item no. Select no.1. <PG> “EXECUTING” is displayed. Returns to the menu.D. Completes transmission.CN1. IO NC.4 on the menu. However. F1.CN1.F1.1 (Chapter 1).c om Notes 1 The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. For the P–G Mate.E.7.F6. For the P–G or P–G Mark II. After using this function.2 (for 9600 baud) ce nt e r. the CN number can be any setting from CN1 to CN4. . <PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command settings. F6 (.4. note that the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO command. BR10) <PC> “LOADER START” is displayed. CN1. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings) <PG> Store transmission data in P–G memory. followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependent BIOS call for input and output. 2) Data is received.2 on the menu. <PG> <PC> Execute FLOADAT. FLOADAT is activated in the PC. 2) DC 2 code is sent to the P–G. the P–G enters the waiting state. “Output Start” is displayed.c Begins transmission. “EXECUTING” is displayed. <PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed. “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed. ce nt e <PG> om <PC> r.3 w w w . <PG> Enter IO command settings.1. (BR10. Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependent BIOS call for input and output. 4) DC 3 code is sent. 1) The P–G issues DC 1. 3) Data is sent. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 During downloading Operation procedure <PC> <PG> Example of input and screen contents Turn on power.c nc Protocol During uploading When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side. After all data has been sent.) F1. Hit any key to end operation. 3) Completion code is received and reception is completed. After all data has been received. F6 <PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command setting. 4) DC 4 code is sent.4. DC 4 is sent and transmission is completed. Returns to the menu. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings) <PG> Turn on [F1] key. IO NC. D. Enters waiting state. 1) DC 1 code is sent to the P–G (data transmission request). “Operation Complete” is displayed. Select no. FLOADAT FILENAME –d Completes transmission. During downloading After the P–G issues a transmission request. 304 . CN1. <PC> followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. then transmission begins. a communications request is issued for the P–G and reception begins. DC 3 is sent and transmission is completed.D. c % Notes 1 The end codes shown here must appear at the beginning of a line. Until a data start code (DS) is received. an error message is displayed and operation terminates. CR (0DH) and LF (0AH) are appended to it in that order.4.D.) D.4 When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing. DC 3 is sent for uploading or DC 4 is sent for downloading.4. 305 .1. data is discarded. In the IBM PC/AT series.4. w Transmission and Receive Data . which effectively has the same result..) appearing within comments are ignored. BUSY Control D. BUSY control is performed by issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes.6 w .5 Data Start and End Codes Start code om The system will automatically determine which of the following seven pairs of start and end codes is used.4. a data reception end code is actually denoted by the sequence CR + LF + an end code. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D.1. it is converted into two characters.1.1. End codes (% etc. When none of these codes are used. it is discarded. nc In other words. the first of which is CR (0DH) followed by LF (0AH). then the file is closed. (3) When an end code (DE) is received..c Data Conversion (Return Codes) (1) When an LF code (0AH) is received.7 (2) When a CR code (0DH) is received. strictly speaking. there is no X parameter. CR LF ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ Discarded DS CR LF ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ CR LF DS CR LF Valid data After the end code (DE) has been sent or received. End code 1 %@A %@E 2 %@0 3 %@1 4 %@2 % 5 %@3 % 6 %@4 % 7 %@5 % % ce nt e r. w D. 4.c nc This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT LADDER format.1. Cannot open output file Wrong data received r. or –d. This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT LADDER data. the following message is displayed. Error Detection and Messages (1) When there is an error in the command line Error in the file name. 306 <Y/N> .) om (2) When the specified file cannot be found Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.c (3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received ce nt e (4) When there is a definite problem with the start code. (FILNAME. Start Code error detected or there is a definite problem with the end code End code error detected File is exist. Messages When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already exists in the current directory. upload or download. –u.8 This software detects the following four types of errors. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D. Parameter Error FLOADAT FILENAME –u/–d set parameter.D. Over write? w w w . When any of the above errors is detected. 3.4.D. press Ctrl + C ). 307 . Incorrect entry found in the command line. 2. %@E or other end code is sent to the P–G to return it to the menu screen. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01 D. 4. a %. Specified file cannot be opened.c om Error Detection and Handling waiting state. data transfer is interrupted (When the power to the PC or P–G is interrupted during operation. the system will return to the DOS screen. the data becomes corrupt and data transfer must be started over from the beginning. D Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file. if an error is detected on the PC. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received. etc. At the same time. was omitted). where * is A or 0 to 5.1. Others D When. the system will enter a waiting state until data transfer is restarted. The following causes can be considered for the above errors: D The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).9 1. (To interrupt the ce nt e r. D Garbage data exists between each unit of data.c nc When data transfer is interrupted during downloading. During downloading. w w w . for some reason. the current operation is canceled. D The start code has been omitted (%@*. D The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.) When data transfer is interrupted during uploading. E. it is possible to use the standard symbol name provided by FANUC.c nc ce nt e The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of system floppy (Vol. 5).SYM r. DATA FILE NAME om CNC TYPE FS16/18–T F16&F18–T. 308 . STANDARD SYMBOL DATA E B–62884EN/01 STANDARD SYMBOL DATA When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined. SYM FS16/18–M F16&F18–M.c Note w w w . c om This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data incorporating sequence program of FANUC PMCs .(For example: Supporting multi–lingual message. This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 F TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) w w w . This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in one ladder program. if both message data size are the same.) 309 . The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data.c nc ce nt e r. EXE) D RB3DUMMY. 1) Memory 235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating this function. S For installation S To generate temporary files S (In case of environmental variable “TMP” of DOS set on hard disk) TOTAL 68KBytes 65KBytes 133KBytes 3. then following files are generated. $TMPW.EXE) to any directory from system floppy disk(Vol.) 3) Hard disk It is necessary to use following disk space.SFM ⋅ RB3BASIC. 3) The message data on the NC is changed by loading the output file of this tool on the PMC input/output operation ([I/O] screen). D CHGMES. 2. This function generate temporary files on the route directory of current drive when environmental variable “TMP” is not set. INSTALLATION Please copy EXE–FILE (_CHGMES.T**.65KBytes disk space for these temporary files.EXE ⋅ IMG2ASC.F. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING 1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMC input/output operation ([I/O] screen).c nc ce nt e r.SFM) 310 .EXE ⋅ ASC2IMG. It is necessary to free max. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 w w w .T** (**=00 to 99) (These temporary files are deleted by this function automatically. Key in “_CHGMES” on the installed directory. Please check each symbol top address of the original changing ladder and the ladder for changing to be the same value.SFM ⋅ RB3MES.5).SFM : example files(. 2) Input the “CHGMES” command with the message data for changing and dummy ladder file(handy file format). 2) Temporary files This function generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which is set by environmental variable “TMP” of DOS. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT It is necessary to use following operating environment for this tool. 1.EXE : Execute files (. 2) This tool for changing the message data execute with the “compare file”. then this tool execute the same check of the message data size. $TMPD.c om <Method of Message size Check> 1) Memory map information is output when the source program is compiled. w w w . (It is not necessary to change the directory when the “PATH” is set. Or. CHGMES [INPUT FILE] [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE] : : A handy file format file that consists of a dummy ladder and message data to replace the message data in the basic message ladder file.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function by activating example command. ACTIVATION Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility. This tool compares message size of the “INPUT FILE” and the “COMPARE FILE” to determine if there is a match.“Operation outline”.c INPUT FILE 311 .) Then key in following command.c nc ce nt e r. 4. By loading this file to the CNC.9 of FAPT LADDER main menu). This file contains only message data. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 ( [COMPARE FILE] ) Return om Example files(. message data in the CNC memory can be substituted.(No. Create this file by compiling the source file and converting to a handy file format file using FAPT LADDER. Then. PMC TYPE : : PMC TYPE (RB3 or RB4) Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs.F. COMPARE FILE (Optional) : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format) Please refer to the Fig. OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by this tool. you can guarantee that only the message will be correctry replaced without crashing other data when you load the ‘OUTPUT FILE’ to CNC.Please change the directory in which this tool is installed. Editing Check the SYMBOL top address by memory map display.c COMPILATION Object file ce nt e Object file INPUT/OUTPUT (F4: Handy File) *3 *1 Handy file format file ŸŸ ŸŸ MEMORY CARD nc FLOPPY Handy file format file Changing to message ROM data(Using this function) ↓ ↓ CHGMES [In. FS18–B. Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory card or handy file.F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 <Outline of Operation> Basic message ladder Message for changing+Dummy ladder Source format program Source format program om Generation. It is not possible to load on boot screen. file] [pmc type] ([Comp. ŸŸ MEMORY CARD OR w Only message data for changing of ROM file Note It is possible to load by memory card only for FS16–B. *2 FLOPPY Handy file format file (Note) w CNC Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC. file] [Out.c (Note) . file]) *1 *2 *3 w . r. FS21–B. and FS15–B (PMC–NB). FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB4/RC/RC3/RC4/NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B–61863E/06) 312 . FS–20. . chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC IMG2ASC. chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmpd. mismatched Please adjust the message size by adding some dummy message to the input file. 2) Following file is generated on current drive.EXE does not exist not in the same directory of CHGMES.t** chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmwd.EXE. Please comfirm the MAP display on the compile function of FAPT LADDER. ⋅ It is impossible to set the file name. ERROR MESSAGES Message Meaning and countermeasure PMC type does not match between applied PMCs.SFM RB3MES. chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file) PMC type of compare file and key in PMC type do not match.EXE does not exist in the same directory of CHGMES.SFM (Message data (50KB)) 3) Check the result by using “FC/A”(DOS COMMAND). when this tool execute for above sample data.c nc You can specify any name for “OUTPUT FILE”. USERTEST.SFM” is used.SFM 1) Please key in the following command.SFM Return .SFM If “NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED” is displayed.) ce nt e r. 6.EXE.SFM RB3 RB3BASIC. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 5. ⋅ Disk is insufficient. w w chgmes : PMC type unmatch (pmc type) w chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and (compare file) are Message size of input file and compare file do not agree.t00 to $tmp*. 313 . because $tmp*. There are some sample files in system floppy disk for checking this function. USING EXAMPLE Check the installation of this function by using the following example.) Execute as the following (In this case the system is installed in main body. RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Data for checking the result (Message data(50KB)) (This file is a normal output file.F.t** It is impossible to make temporary file.c om RB3BASIC. It is possible to check result by comparing “OUTPUT FILE” and this file.“USERTEST. chgmes : Cannot start ASC2IMG ASC2IMG. A:¥>CHGMES RB3DUMMY. chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file) PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match. C:¥>FC/A USERTEST.SFM USERTEST.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format) (Message data (50KB)+Ladder (END1+END2)) : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format) (Message data (50KB)+Ladder data+Symbol&Comment data) RB3MES.t99 exist. the result is correct. In this example. img2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file. and re-activate. and re-activate. and re-activate. Please correct as error message. img2asc : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) B–62884EN/01 Message Meaning and countermeasure Temporary file cannot be closed.c om chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w). w w w . asc2img : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. asc2img : Conversion area in input is conflicted Ladder header of the input file is crushed. Please check the disk space.c nc ce nt e r. Please free up 235KB of more memory. Please free up 235KB or more memory. Please re-make the input file. asc2img : Unknown file type Illegal format of the input file. Please change the fomat. asc2img : Cannot open file There is no input file. Please check the disk space.F.t** 314 . asc2img : (input file) : Record No. asc2img : Cannot close file It is impossible to close the file. asc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file. and re-active. and reactivate. Please check the disk space. Please check the disk space.**has ********************** There is an invalid data of input file. Drive where ROM format files are created Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A.EXE.c om (1) Windows 3.EXE Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.c nc ce nt e r. 315 . the following symptom occurs. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists b. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S B–62884EN/01 G CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S w w w .1 Function Guide.G.EXE is used with write caching enabled. disabling entry.BAT contains a command line of SMARTDRV. [Symptom] When SMARTDRV. supplied from Microsoft.EXE When SMARTDRV.EXE.1 1) SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled. pay attention to the following: Enable write caching SMARTDRV. for detailed descriptions about how to use SMARTDRV. D The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer. Alarm message : “Received data invalid” “OVERRUN” [Measure] When SMARTDRV. disable write caching for the following disk drives: a.EXE is used. and a ROM format file is to be created on drive B SMARTDRV a b → disable write caching for drives A and B Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3. For IBM PC/AT On–line cable IBM PC/AT cable 25–pin male connector r.c 9–pin female connector 25–pin female connector 25–pin male connector ce nt e CNC. or P–G 2. For IBM PS/2 IBM PS/2 On–line cable nc 9–pin female connector w w w . or P–G . or P–G (P–G Mark II or P–G Mate).H. ROM writer. 1. ROM writer. ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer). DATA TRANSFER CABLES H B–62884EN/01 DATA TRANSFER CABLES IBM PC/AT om Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC.c IBM PS/2 cable 316 25–pin male connector 25–pin female connector 25–pin male connector CNC. c nc DR 25–pin male connector r. DATA TRANSFER CABLES B–62884EN/01 D On–line cable (A08B–0031–K801/K802) 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 20 20 6 6 8 8 7 7 1 1 RD RS CS 25–pin male connector ER DR CD SG RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG ce nt e D IBM PC/AT cable CD RD SD 9–pin female connector ER SG RS CS CI 1 8 2 3 3 2 4 20 5 7 6 6 7 4 8 5 9 22 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 20 20 6 6 8 8 7 7 1 1 CD RD SD ER SG DR 25–pin female connector RS CS CI .c FG SD om 2 SD w w w D IBM PS/2 cable SD RD RS 25–pin female connector CS ER DR CD SG FG 317 SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 25–pin female connector .H. c om INQUIRY FORM 318 .I.c nc ce nt e r. INQUIRY FORM I B–62884EN/01 w w w . BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.c 1 om FANUC sales person 2 3 5 [Usage environment] Machine type used (PC) ce nt e 4 OS Version EMS board: Yes / No Other equipment (printer.I.c [Details of inquiry] nc Please print out the CONFIG. ( ) No.SYS and AUTOEXEC. etc. Date of purchase r.) (Manufacturer: ) (Manufacturer: ) (Manufacturer: ) (Manufacturer: ) w w . ( ) Address Fax No. INQUIRY FORM B–62884EN/01 Company name Section Person in charge Phone No. 319 . Product name Ordering code Version No. w Please use this form when you have any questions about this product. 47 Differences from Fapt Ladder. 259. 249 Handy File+3. 28 Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and PC. 241.5” Floppy Disk (MS–DOS Format). 239. 242. 299 [G] Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program. 251 . 226 Conversion of a Source Program to a Mnemonic File. 302 Function Overview. 307 Error Detection and Messages. 293 Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter. 10 About Symbol & Comment Data. 199 CONFIG. 248 Converting ROM Format File. 243. 247. 242 Data Conversion (Return Codes). 297 w Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program. 282 Error. 305 [I] Data Start and End Codes. 105 Communications Settings. 35 Communication. 106 Executing or Stopping a Program.c BUSY Control. 306 Error Message List.SYS. 222 Decompile Option. 237 Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format). 264. 5 Functions Specific to Individual PMC Models. 298 G : Message Editing. 305 [C] C : I/O Module Editing. 216 D : System Parameter Editing. 249. 194 Command Input During Startup. 25 Display System Information. 271 Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram). 12 Automatic Compilation and Decompilation. 243 Editing. 195 ce nt e Cautions for Using the O/S. 221 Compile Options. 240. 26 Configuration and Installation of Package. 249. 220 [H] [D] H : Printout. 244 Error Detection and Handling. 204 Diagnose.Index B–62884EN/01 [A] A : Initial Menu. 298 w Converting by System Parameter Editing. 202 Decompile. 115. 256. 241 Changing the Printer Specification.c Conversion from FAPT LADDER. 294 Directory Configuration after Installation. 281 w Conversion of Sequence Program. 43 File Configuration. 283 Examples of Operation. 240 Backup of User Program. 305 Data Transfer Cables. 28 File System. 238. 243 Error (at Editing Step Sequence). 303 Compilation. 251. 247 Fatal Error. 302 Common System Operations. 218 r. 224 F : Symbol & Comment Editing. 258 File. 14 . 91 Exit. 256. 100 [B] om [E] B : Title Editing. 315 Change of Each Setting File. 288 Decompilation. 251. 238 About PMC Program. 316 I : Compile. 248. 46 [F] nc Compile. 290 E : Ladder/Step Sequence Editing. CNF). 118 PMC Programming Method. 101 nc Ladder monitor. 5 Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt. 271 Selecting On–Line Function from Off–Line Function. 207 Password Set Function. 47 [M] w Memory Card Interface in the Personal Computer and Memory Card. 90 Print Format–1: SETUP Menu. 45 [N] N : On–Line Monitor. 264 Ladder Debugging Function. 227 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION. 44 Mnemonic Editing. 47 Print Format–2 (AMOFTRP. 22 Operating Environment. 76 L : Input/Output. 101. 176 Outputting to Split Files. 284 . 37 [K] [P] Package Configuration. 106 [S] Sample Mnemonic Files (All–format). 10 PMC Status Window. 103 Protocol. 209 Off–Line Function. 256 r. 18 Restoring PMC Parameter. 304 [R] Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu. 174 Program Backup.Index B–62884EN/01 [O] I/O Module Editing.c Overview of the On–Line Functions. 64 Ladder Diagram/Step Sequence Editing. 37 Installation. 53 Inquiry Form. 236 Sequence Program Creation. 8 Setting Program Options. 33 J : Decompilation. 223 Monitoring a Ladder. 224 w Mnemonic File Format. 200 [L] PMC Alarm Status. 43 MS–DOS. 212 Menu Structure. 184 Ladder Monitor. 220 . 33 w Message Editing. 208 [J] Overview of Operation. 17 K : Mnemonic Conversion. 45 Selecting Off–Line Function from On–Line Function. 169 Printout. 170 I/O Port Setting. 89 PMC Parameter. 30.c Loading of Program. 209 On–line editing. 18 OPEN CNC System Configurations. DAT/* . 115 Input/Output. 203 om Output Item Setting. 15 Operation. 318 On–Line Functions. 185 Link.INF/Message File). 229 Saving PMC Parameter. 233 Sample Mnemonic Files (Single–format). 258 ce nt e Password. 211 Starting the Ladder Editing Package. 31 Transmission and Receive Data. 61 Title Data Editing. 291 System Parameter Editing . 29 ce nt e [T] r. 305 om Starting the On–Line Functions. 95 The Note if the Step Sequence Function is Selected When Setting a Model. 257. 102 [U] Supported PMC Functions. 250. 175 Transfer to and from PMC. 4 w [W] . 117 Standard Symbol Data. 38 Storing to the Program. 255.c w w Warning.c Symbol & Comment Editing. 234 System Configuration File “%%% FLSET. 301 System Parameters. 308 Tool for Changing Message Data (CHGMES). 73 Signal Trace Function. 262.Index B–62884EN/01 Signal Analysis Function. 7 User Batch File Execution. 197 Transfer from P–G. 234 Signal Status Window. 309 Start and Terminate. 92 The Overview of Ladder Editing Package. 246 The Major Functions. 172 Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program. 165 nc . 241. CNF”. 282 Utility. 302 Starting and Ending Printing. 270 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram). 4 Signal Trigger Function. 235 The Constitution of Source Program. .c Contents om FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–62884EN) w .Sep.c ce nt e nc . ’96 Date 01 evision w w Revision Record Contents Revision Date r. c All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.c nc · No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.om r. ce nt e · . w w w .